Home

Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi

1. Icdfpdui KLC 031202 Figure notes Port Carrier C Port Carrier B Expansion Control Carrier A Fans Port Carrier D Port Carrier E o0 F Q DY Global Power Supply May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 43 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Perform these tasks before you begin the installation e Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway on page 44 e Unpack and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet on page 44 e Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 107 e Check Circuit Packs on page 45 e Correct Shipping Errors on page 45 Perform these tasks to install the media gateways e Position the Media Gateway on page 45 e Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional on page 46 and Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment on page 46 e Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 46 if required Ay WARNING If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room then connections to this ground should be made by a licensed electrician See Approved Grounds for more information e Connect AC Power and Ground on page 49 or Connect DC Power and Ground on page 59 e Connect Remote Power Off Cable on page 69 e Connect External Alarm Cable on page 71
2. May 2002 122 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect MDF Cross Connect Fields MDF Cross Connect Fields Each Main Distribution Frame MDF contains a trunk auxiliary field and a distribution field The trunk auxiliary field contains three cross connect areas The green field terminates the network interface leads from the Central Office CO and provides the terminals to cross connect the leads to the purple or yellow fields as required A single row of the 110 type terminal block can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The purple field terminates the trunk circuits from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration with WP 90929 List 1 or 3 concentrator cables Also 25 pair cables can be used to terminate trunk circuits from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration with each trunk circuit pack connecting to one 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block Each terminal block row can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The yellow field provides cross connect terminals for all miscellaneous leads from the S8700 Multi Connect configuration such as alarm monitors emergency transfer relay power and attendant console power This field is used for emergency transfer wiring paging equipment music sources and so forth The distribution field contains four cross connect areas The purple field port field terminates 25 pair cables from
3. o g X E Ss Z N P Z LZ B B Z m E MMN NW P SS cadfdup KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Media Gateway 1 PN1 with 1 Switch Node Port Networks 2 through 16 H600 278 Metallic Cable To other port networks Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 75 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between the EI and SNI on the PN1 media gateway is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 Connect the cables between PN1 and each of the other PN media gateways in an alternating port slot order 3 19 4 18 5 17 and so forth Media Gateway 1 is PN1 with 1 Switch Node May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 9 9 P SS Oo Oo I NSSSSS P SS A NSSSSSSS AOUDAODUDAQUQUDALL UL c 38 m a lt an C O amp 39 na E C Cc a EC ramm H Ca F E cI Ei c 3 p een I I D M NW J D MMMMUW E SUM E MMMM cadferr KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Med
4. 1151A1 2 Power Supply Front pwr_sup1 CJL 051496 P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch The P333T PWR complies with the UL standard UL 1950 second edition Complies UL 1950 Approved C22 2 No 950 Std Approved CE For safety instructions see P333T PWR Important Safety Instructions on page 239 For installation instructions see Connect the P333T PWR on page 240 May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 239 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies P333T PWR Important Safety Instructions Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When using this switch the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this switch This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibility of electrical shock do not use it near water The Avaya P333T PWR switch and modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Do not touch the circuit boards unless instructed to do so This product should be operated only from the type of AC and optional DC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where
5. Connect the Hardware on page 242 e Completing the Installation Administration on page 261 e Accessing the Avaya 8700 Media Server on page 266 Testing the Complete Configuration on page 271 May 2002 16 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Pre installation Setup Pre installation Setup The pre install team should have done the following tasks If they were not all done do not continue with the installation Verify that the 19 in 48 cm equipment rack s was installed to EIA 310D or equivalent data rack standards You may need shelves or some other means to support the very heavy UPSs Verify that the 19 in EIA 310D 48 cm open equipment rack s was installed securely and grounded per Approved Grounds Verify that cabling for the Internet Protocol Server Interface IPSI circuit packs is labeled and run from the control hardware rack to the port networks Verify that you have the required network information in hand Refer to the Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8700 Multi Connect for the list of required network information Verify that you have all the equipment on site Refer to the Pre Installation Information S8700 Multi Connect for the list of required hardware Verify that the services laptop has the right hardware and software Refer to the Pre Installation Information S8700 Multi Connect for the list of computer specifications Verify that you have th
6. Interconnect cabling between port networks Direct connect to rack hardware Direct connect to each port network duplex and high critical Switch connect to port networks duplex and high critical 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm all equipment is present 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions 3 If any equipment is missing report the information to your Avaya representative May 2002 44 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway A CAUTION A media gateway may weigh as much as 800 Ib 363 kg and may be top heavy Use extreme caution 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the container If the container has been shaken or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating potential damage Report any damage according to local shipping instructions Ad DANGER Take care to avoid injury while cutting and removing the 2 metal bands 2 Unpack the media gateway and remove all packing material 3 Move the media gateway into its proper position 4 Do not adjust the leveling feet at this time Unpack and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet The auxiliary cabinet can be positioned adjacent to the control hardware in the rack or any media gateway 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and o
7. SSS a 7 widmgrnd LJK 092697 Figure notes 1 First Media Gateway 5 AC Load Center Single Point Ground 2 Additional Media Gateways if 6 Less than 50 Wire feet 15 2 m IINE 7 10 AWG 25 6 mm Ground Wire 3 6 AWG 40 16 mm Media to CBC Gateway GROUND Wire 4 Media Gateway Ground Terminal Block Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway 1 Mount the single point ground block to any surface between the media gateways and the AC load center single point ground The single point ground block must be mounted to a non metallic surface 2 Atthe bottom rear of the first media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground block See Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram on page 54 3 Route the opposite end of the wire to the single point ground block and connect 4 Atthe next if provided DC Power media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block GROUND DISCHARGE bar May 2002 54 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 5 Route the media gateway GROUND wire to first media gateway and connect to the single point ground block and connect block gt NOTE If a media gateway is located remotely in a separate room or building route the media gateway media gateway GROUND wire to an approved protective ground 6 Repea
8. 296 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Continued Card LED Label Procedure CI FAIL Check wiring for its associated DS1 reference and replace the circuit pack if necessary ST3 FAIL Replace the circuit pack ST3 LOCK Ignore this LED ST3 HOLDOVER Ignore this LED ST3 FREE RUN Ignore this LED TOCA FAIL Replace the circuit pack TOCA PORT ALM Replace the circuit pack if necessary Verify Timing to the Media Server 1 To administer the Stratum 3 clock type change synchronization and press Enter 2 Type 3 in the stratum field 3 Typethe port network number where the TN780 Tone Clock circuit packs reside in the port network field gt NOTE Wait 1 minute for the software to reconfigure the media server synchronization 4 Verify the results of test 649 If test 649 fails with a code of 2101 then check the wiring for EXTSYNO and EXTSYNI Refer to the maintenance book for your configuration If test 649 is successful then the media server is getting correct timing from the Stratum 3 clock Resolve Alarms As a last step inspect the alarms log Use the media server web interface 1 Click on View Current Alarms and see if any alarms were generated If so resolve any alarms that may exist using the maintenance book for your configuration May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 297 Troubleshooting an Installation Troubleshooting an Installa
9. 1 Plug the Ethernet switch into the UPS e Duplex reliability Ethernet switch A into UPS A High or critical reliability Ethernet switch A into UPS A and Ethernet switch B into UPS B 2 Connect the services laptop computer RS 232 serial port to the port labeled Console on the front of the Ethernet switch using the cable supplied with the Ethernet switch 3 Open a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal 4 Administer the terminal emulation port settings 9600 baud rate No parity e 8 bits e 1 stop bit 5 Login to the Ethernet switch with the appropriate login and password Refer the user guide supplied with the Ethernet switch 6 Using the Command Line Interface CLI of the Ethernet switch set the following parameters P address and subnet mask of the Ethernet switch IP address of the Trap Receiver SNMP community string for Get Set and Trap May 2002 36 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack SECURITY ALERT The Get and Set community names are generally configured with default values of Public and Private respectively If required the local network administrator must supply values for their Network Management System This is a security issue For example the default Set community name of Private with it s widely known password could be used to shutdown or reconfigure the Ethernet switch via a SNMP message 1 When prompted to save configuration type Y
10. We recommend you be on the active media server 1 Click Execute Pingall and select Other server s All IPSIs UPS s Ethernet switches to verify connectivity to these units May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Completing the Installation Administration Completing the Installation Administration This section covers the following tasks e Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary on page 261 e Upgrade Cajun Ethernet Switch Firmware on page 262 e Verify translations on page 262 e Enable and Disable Ethernet Switch Ports on page 262 e View alarms on page 263 e Back up the media server on page 264 e Release busied out media server on page 265 e Register the 8700 Multi Connect configuration on page 265 Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to the active Avaya S8700 Media Server using both the web based administration application and an ASA connection 1 WEB Click View IPSI Version and select Query All to verify that all IPSI circuit packs have the required IPSI firmware version 2 ASA Enter the command list ipserver interface return to determine which IPSI in high critical configuration port networks is active 3 WEB Click Download IPSI Firmware and select the start time which IPSIs to download to and the file to download Firmware download fil
11. 2 Port Media Gateway B 3 Port Media Gateway C 4 Port Media Gateway D 5 Media Gateway Clips May 2002 104 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect S8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables 1 Connect the cables for port networks PNs as shown in Connections for Media Gateway Stacks on page 97 gt NOTE The fiber optic cables are connected to the Main Distribution Frame MDF in Cabling Port Networks on page 116 2 Connectthe fiber optic cable The Inter Cabinet Cable Running List is provided with the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Each row on the list represents a cable connection Use the running list to determine where to connect each fiber optic cable CAUTION Do not route fiber optic cables and the B25A cables together May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 105 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack fq io ol F OOO NSN o 5 NOON Z ET o 9L AUI SS o Ge cS a cadfder KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 AHFI1
12. Turn Circuit Breakers Off The main circuit breaker on a DC power cabinet is located on the front of the power distribution unit The circuit breakers on the rear of the power distribution unit control the individual carriers See Power Distribution Unit J558890CH on page 66 for the location of the carrier breakers 1 Setthe main circuit breaker to OFF 2 Setthe carrier circuit breakers to OFF May 2002 66 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Distribution Unit J58890CH pcdf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 o a A W N J Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery cabinet to J20 Carrier Circuit Breakers Ground Terminal Block Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 1 AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to large battery cabinet For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative Ground Terminal Block To AC load center or approved single point ground block Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways Be sure the main circuit breaker is OFF Measure and cut 2 pieces of 1 AWG 70 44 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC power cabinet to the first media gateway At the DC power cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet
13. 258A Adapter 102605136 BR2580A Adapter 403384720 356A Adapter 104158829 400B Adapter 103848859 400B2 Adapter 104152558 ZD8AJ Adapter 103881421 May 2002 139 140 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room This section explains the station circuit distribution from the equipment room to the information outlets for new wiring installations Example connection diagrams are provided to show the options for running and connecting the station cables If most of the telephones voice terminals that require remote powering are within 250 ft 76 2 m of the equipment room 4 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to the information outlets If this is not the case or if the customer requires 2 point administration 3 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to satellite locations Then the 4 pair station circuits are run from the satellite locations to the information outlets This section has information about e 4 Pair Station Circuits on page 140 e 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution on page 140 Lists of terminals that can be connected to the 58700 Multi Connect configuration are provided in Voice and Data Terminals on page 145 e Administration Terminals on page 147 4 Pair Station Circuits Four pair circuits can be run directly from an equipment room MDF to
14. Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to Media Server 1 The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface This procedure assumes that the license and authentication file are on the services laptop May 2002 26 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack 1 Click Upload Files to Server via browser Upload Files to Server This page allows data files to be loaded onto the server from the machine that your browser is running on In one or more ofthe fields below enter the file name s to be sent to the server File s to EE upload TSBs NENNEN Browse LOAD FILE About This Screen 2 Click Browse next to the top field to open the File Upload window on your computer Find the license file that you need to upload to the media server Repeat step 2 for the second field to find the Avaya authentication file 4 When all the files to be uploaded show in the fields click Load File to upload all the files to the media server Once the license and Avaya authentication files are uploaded to the media server you must install them Install the license and Avaya authentication files CAUTION If you are doing an upgrade this procedure will be prompted for during the upgrade installation wizard DO NOT install the license file using the following procedure if you are performing an up
15. This section has information about Equipment Room Cabling Labels on page 128 e Cable Routing Guidelines on page 129 e Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installation on page 129 e Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 153 e Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway on page 130 And procedures for e Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable on page 152 e Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 153 e Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 153 e Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity on page 154 e Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF on page 156 e Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF on page 157 Equipment Room Cabling Labels The purple port label shown in Equipment Room Cabling Labels on page 130 is installed on both ends of the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary field and or distribution field The top blue yellow building and floor labels are for cables connecting from the equipment room to a site satellite location on another floor or in another building The yellow label is for auxiliary circuits connecting to the trunk auxiliary field The bottom blue yellow label is for 25 pair cables connecting to site satellite closets Equipment Room Labels on page 130 details
16. copy to media server 25 install 25 auxiliary cabinet equipment 46 auxiliary cabinet cabling to MDF 157 auxiliary cabinets cabinet location 46 auxiliary connector outputs 196 auxiliary power alarms 204 attendant console 201 Avaya MultiVantage software add IPSI translation 39 input to active media server 37 reset 37 avaya site administration set up for active media server 37 set up for dedicated services port 36 Avaya Site Administration ASA 268 May 2002 302 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Index B back up media server 264 back up battery 231 232 battery connecting 93 mounting 232 battery cabinet connecting to DC power cabinet 67 battery charger optional 58 battery holdover assembly 55 battery holdover connecting 56 57 battery interface module installing 60 battery leads connecting 55 battery connecting DC 64 bonding conductor coupled 166 BR2580A adapter 136 busy out busy out standby server 32 release media server 265 C cabinet cable clamps 134 cabinet address plugs 98 cabinet clip 103 cabinet ground 83 cabinet grounds 49 94 cabinet grounds connecting 62 cabinet location auxiliary cabinet 46 EPN cabinets 80 PPN cabinet 45 80 cabinet cabling to MDF 156 cabinets attaching to floor 47 connecting DC pewer 66 cabinets stabilizing for earthquake protection 100 101 cable fiber optic 104 cable clamps 162 cable clamps for cable s
17. page 222 2 Connect CO trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk 3 Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk 4 Connect telephone leads from the purple analog line circuit pack row connecting block to the LC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each telephone 5 Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field 6 Install the telephone Connect telephone to the information outlet Install patch cords jumper wires between the media gateway side and the station May 2002 224 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Install External Ringing Connections for external ringing are at an information outlet The media gateway side of the Main Distribution Frame MDF is connected to a TN2183 or equivalent Analog Line circuit pack The circuitry and power source for the device are customer provided gt NOTE A maximum of 3 devices can connect to 1 analog line circuit pack port 1 Wire the ringing device to the information outlet as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 224 and Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 201 2 Administer per the
18. where lt ipaddr gt is the customer provided IP address and lt netmask gt is the customer provided subnet mask Press Enter 9 If required type set control gateway gateway where gateway is the customer provided IP address for their gateway Press Enter 10 Ifrequired use the set vlan priority set vlan tag set vlan id and set diffserv commands to enter VLAN and diffserv parameters for the IPSI Use the help command to obtain syntax guidelines for these commands 11 Check the LCD Verify that it has an I P with a filled in V showing at the bottom See IP Server Interface LEDs WwW cue e eo wo N e e E d S Je E 3 Rv vw I8 12 Type quit to logoff the IPSI gt NOTE Control network settings IP address subnet mask and gateway will be placed into effect when the user exits the IPADMIN session 13 Disconnect the laptop from the faceplate gt NOTE Always use the arp d 192 11 13 6 command see step four to clear the ARP cache on the laptop before connecting to another IPSI If the cache is not cleared the laptop will appear to hang and will not connect to the next IPSI 14 Repeat for each IPSI circuit pack May 2002 260 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware Verify connectivity to the media servers The following administration is done on a computer used to access the Avaya 8700 Media Server using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface gt NOTE
19. 60 kilograms Use caution to avoid injury 1 Unpack the media gateways from the shipping material and inspect for damage 2 Openand remove the front door and rear panels from the media gateway 3 Verify the label near the circuit breaker on the power supply toward the rear of each media gateway corresponds to the local voltage type Ay DANGER If the label is different than the voltage type at the site notify your Avaya representative immediately for a replacement power supply Do not under any circumstances connect an incorrect power supply to a power source Check Circuit Packs 1 Ensure all circuit packs are fully inserted into the proper slots according to the Customer Service Document CSD Report any discrepancies in circuit pack type or quantity to your Lucent Technologies representative For detailed circuit pack descriptions refer to Designing the Avaya S8700 Media Gateway for Multi Connect Configuration 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions 1 Red tag all defective and over shipped equipment and return to the nearest Material Stocking Location MSL For Avaya Order Exception in the United States call 1 800 772 5409 For international customers contact your order service agent 2 Direct all short shipped reports to the nearest MSL Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions May 2002 80 Installing
20. 9 m Maximum Route Cables Through Sliding Door Circuit Breaker Supplied 10 32 Screw 10 Star Washer and 10 32 Hex Nut Inset Showing DC Power Connector Male May 2002 89 90 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit o pcedfcd1 PDH 101596 Figure notes Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet DC Power Distribution Unit position to right of the media gateway stack White Wire connect to Circuit Breaker See inset Green Ground Wires and Black Wire connect to the 48 VDC Return Bus 48 VDC Bus Inset 12 in 30 5 cm from floor to DC Power Distribution Unit DC Power Cable to Power Connector on Each Media Gateway DC Power Distribution Unit Power Cord route to rear of DC Power Cabinet Route Power Cord Through Sliding Door Circuit Breaker Supplied 10 32 Screw 10 Star Washer and 10 32 Hex Nut Inset Showing DC Power Connector Male May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet Stack Rear pssssssss Teron CNET DNI pwrdist4 RBP 052896 Figure notes 1 DC Power Cabinet Stack 2 DC Power Cables Daisy Chained Between DC Power Cabinets 3 Connect to 48 VDC Bus 4 Connect to 48 VDC Return Bus 5 Inset Applies to 48 VDC and 4
21. CI circuit pack according to CI Option Switch Settings on page 109 2 Set the options on the Stratum 3 Clock ST3 circuit pack according to ST3 Clock Circuit Pack Option Switch Settings on page 109 3 Setthe options on the Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA circuit pack according to Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA Circuit Pack on page 110 4 Set the Stratum 2 Stratum 3 switch to the STRATUM 3 position CI Option Switch Settings Switch Function Position 1 T1 Select OFF enable default ON disable 2 CC Select OFF enable ON disable default 3 Framing Select OFF ESF ON D4 default 4 BX 25 OFF enable ON disable default ST3 Clock Circuit Pack Option Switch Settings Switch Status Results SW1 OFF minor alarm never output Minor Alarm ON minor alarm is output if holdover occurs Control SW2 OFF major alarm is output and fail lamp lights if 5 VDC Major power is lost and 4 kHz output is lost Alarm Control ON major alarm is output and fail lamp lights if 5 VDC power is lost and 4 kHz output is lost and holdover occurs gt NOTE Only SW 1 and SW2 are used SW1 controls the output of alarm signals from the Stratum 3 Clock circuit pack May 2002 110 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Install the Stratum 3 clock Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA Circuit Pack Switch Range 1 ft 500 ft 1000ft 1500ft 2000ft 2500ft 3000 ft 50
22. TRANSFER TEST SWITCH NORMAL ACTIVATED OPERATION TRUNK IDENTIFICATION TRUNK 1 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 2 Circuit Start Selection Switches 3 4 led808a LJK 040896 Trunk Identification Label 25 Pair Male Connector May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Mounting 808a em LJK 042396 Figure notes 1 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 4 25 Pair Male Connector 2 Earfor Screw Mount 5 Circuit Start Switches 3 Cut Out for Snap Mount Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel gt NOTE The 808A must be installed in a location that can be accessed only by authorized personnel The location must meet standard environmental considerations such as temperature humidity and so forth 1 Verify dial tone is present at each trunk circuit 2 Locate the circuit start selection switches see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel on page 216 These are the first 10 two position switches on the left side of the Emergency Transfer Panel They are used to set each of the five incoming trunk lines to either loop start or ground start Two switches are used for each circuit switches 1 and 2 are used for circuit 1 switches 3 and 4 are used for circuit 2 and so forth See Trunk Test Switches on page 218 For loop start set the switches to the left For ground start set the switches to the right 4 Connect
23. The other LEDs are exclusively under hardware control so will not flash during the test Refer to the OEM user documentation that comes with the media server for information on those LEDs During the 1 minute test the Active Standby and U2 LEDs alternate from being on amber for second and off for 1 second off The transmit LED cycles from red on 1 second off 1 second to green on 1 second off 1 second May 2002 274 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Using the media server web interface test the LEDs on the front of the media server 1 2 3 Under Diagnostics click Test Server LEDs On the Test Server LEDs screen click Test LEDs Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on your media server and the transmit LED on your duplication card back of media server to ensure they are blinking Interpreting the test results An abnormal condition is indicated if an LED shows any of the following flashing patterns LED flashes red This indicates that the green element is either burned out or not controlled LED flashes green This indicates that the red element is either burned out or not controlled LED flashes between red and amber This indicates that the red element is stuck on LED flashes between green and amber This indicates that the green element is stuck on LED stays amber continuously This indicates that either the media server is hung or the LED controller is stuck LED s
24. by conducting a search using Avaya as manufacturer European Union Declarations of Conformity CE Avaya Inc declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the CE Conformit Europe nne mark conforms to the European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface BRI and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface PRI and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13 as applicable Copies of these Declarations of Conformity DoCs signed by the Vice President of MultiVantage Solutions research and development Avaya Inc can be obtained by contacting your local sales representa tive and are available on the following Web site http support avaya com elmodocs2 DoC IDoC index jhtml Japan This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Con trol Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may occur in which case the user may be required to take corrective actions COREL PRARES BREA ERMA VCCI odi CESS 7 7AATBRBEREIE CH ORE AKEERBE CHATS CENE GEE SRIFILEBHVIETF OBIECIT BEIBRENSLEBHVETF Network Connections Digital Connections The equipment described in this document can be connected to the
25. clock status Services Ethernet port Network Ethernet port May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 279 Testing the Complete Configuration LED display on the IPSI circuit pack static address Figure notes 1 IPSI has a static IP address 2 IPSI has connectivity and an IP address The display also indicates connectivity see LED display indicating connectivity status May 2002 280 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration LED display indicating connectivity status ledlipsi KLC 030502 Figure notes Connectivity Status 1 2 3 4 5 IPSI is connected to media server no yes yes yes yes IPSI has an IP address no no yes yes no Laptop computer is connected to no no no yes yes IPSI services port Circuit Pack LEDs Typically each circuit pack has 3 LEDs on the front panel The Circuit Pack LEDs table describes the red green and yellow LEDs and their meaning Also see Circuit Pack LEDs on Faceplate Circuit Pack LEDs LED Color Status Description Red Alarm The media server has detected a fault in this circuit pack The alarm log should contain an on board alarm The red LED is also lit briefly when a circuit pack is inserted or reset If the circuit pack passes its initialization tests the LED goes out Green Testing The media server is currently running t
26. 1 Connect a pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block and the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer on page 221 Connect Central Office CO trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 223 Installing and Wiring Telephones 4 Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field The ST terminal leads should be terminated on the following pairs 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 or 22 the first pair of any 3 pair group 5 Install the telephone Connect telephone to the information outlet Install patch cords jumper wires between the media gateway side and the station side of the station distribution field on the MDF Install Telephones Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field 1 Connecta pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block to the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension on
27. 110P type terminal blocks on a frame 160 Install Cable Slack Managers 162 May 2002 Contents 9 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect May 2002 Install Sneak Fuse Panels 164 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor 166 Connecting to the Customer s Network 168 Avaya 8700 Media Server 168 TN799DP Control LAN 169 Installing a TN799DP C LAN 169 Administering the TN799DP 170 The TN2302AP IP Media Processor 171 IP Media Processor 171 Installing the TN2302AP IP Media Processor 173 TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL 178 Important File Specifications 179 Caveats 179 Installing VAL 179 Configuring the MultiVantage Software for the TN2501AP 182 Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator 185 Installing and Wiring Telephones 186 Wiring Telephones 186 Connect Telephones 187 Connectable Telephones and Consoles 187 Connecting a Typical Telephone 188 Connect Adjunct Power 189 Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station 190 Analog Tie Trunk Example 192 Digital Tie Trunk Example 192 DS1 Tie Trunk Example 193 Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks 193 DS1 Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit 194 Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only 196 Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity 199 Adjunct Power Connection Locations 200 Attendant Console Example 201 Task List Attendant Console Procedures 201 Attendant Console Cabling Distances
28. 121 MDF connections single carrier cabinet 120 MDF cross connect fields 122 MDF hardware 119 MDF labels 125 MDF location 123 MDF cabling to auxiliary cabinet 157 MDF cabling to cabinet 156 media gateway connect SCC1 ribbon cables 243 media server backing up 264 busy out standby 32 connect Ethernet cables 242 input translations 37 LEDs 272 release busy out 265 set up ASA for active media server 37 set up ASA for dedicated services port 36 testing LEDs 273 verify connectivity 260 media server 1 configure 21 test LEDs 28 verify connection to LAN 27 media server 2 configure 29 test LEDs 32 verify connection to LAN 31 media server interchange testing 285 media server web interface 267 mixed AC DC powered cabinet connecting 67 modem access to media server 268 modularity 3 pair and 4 pair 199 mounting terminal blocks 158 160 music on hold testing 293 O off premises connections 209 off premises digital line circuit protectors 212 off premises protection 211 212 off premises station wiring 209 off premises stations 209 order checking 43 78 out of building connections 209 out of building stations 209 outputs cable for control carrier 196 P patch cords installing and administering 150 pin designations port circuit packs and telephones 191 198 207 playback announcement testing 293 PN expansion interface exchange testing 288 TDM testing 287 Port Assignm
29. 2 When completed disconnect the services laptop computer from the Ethernet switch 3 If high or critical reliability repeat steps 1 through 8 for Ethernet switch B Refer to the Job Aids for Avaya 88700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration for the proper addresses and community strings Customize the Active Media Server Set up Avaya Site Administration Dedicated Services port The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to the 8700 Media Server via the dedicated services port default port 2 Eth1 gt NOTE The following procedure establishes a 8700 Multi Connect configuration record for use when connected to the dedicated Avaya Services port If this configuration record already exists from a previous installation this procedure is not required gt NOTE Ata minimum Avaya Site Administration 1 11 should be used to work properly with the Avaya 8700 media server and the Avaya Multi Vantage software 1 Plug the services laptop into the dedicated services port default 2 Eth1 on the back of media server 1 the active media server 2 Onthelaptop launch Avaya Site Administration 3 Click on File 4 Click on New 5 Click on Switch 6 Follow the Add Switch wizard to build a configuration record for the current customer e Give the switch record a name that indicates it will work with all Avaya S8700 media servers i e S8700 Service Port Select Network Connection as the co
30. 25 6 mm Wire to 5 Station Distribution Field Coupled Bonding Conductor O oco Oo May 2002 132 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Cable Installation Cable Routing to Bottom Terminal Blocks 1758432b MMR 052996 Figure notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 6 Cable Slack Manager Number 2 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered Media 7 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 Su OS 8 Media Gateway s m pavesi Manaset Nimperdi 9 Building Cables Through Cable 4 Trunk Auxiliary Field Trough 5 Station Distribution Field 10 10AWG 25 6 mm Wire to Coupled Bonding Conductor May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 133 Coupled Bonding Conductor Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated telecommunications cable The mutual coupling between the bonding conductor and the pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment The conductor consists of a 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire tie wrapped to the inside wiring cable and terminated at the CBC terminal bar at the Main Distribution Frame MDF A minimum of 12 inches 30 48 cm spacing must be maintained between the CBC and other power and ground leads The 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire must be long enough to reach the telecommunications cables at the rear of the media gateways follow these cables to the MDF and to terminate at the CBC May 2002 134 Installing t
31. 58700 Multi Connect 97 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connections for Media Gateway Stacks E le 9 ea 5 o lo e Lo o lo Loo Vex oli AU SS cc s y J cm cadfdcr KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN Pinfield Slot 17 TDM bus Cable WP 91716 L3 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN Pinfield Slot 00 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator Slot 17 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator Port Media Gateway D Port Media Gateway C Port Media Gateway B Expansion Control Media Gateway A May 2002 98 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Verify Port Media Gateway Address Plugs The address plug is a jumper field on port media gateways J58890H only The address plug is located on the far right hand side of the backplane to the right of slot 00 A group of six pins is labeled for the media gateway carrier jumper connections Verify that the address plug for each port car
32. Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity 9 9 i 26 1 1 rt i 1 2 2 2 2 27 3 3 8 3 9 2 4 4 4 4 28 5 5 5 5 Q i 3 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 widi3pm PDH 011397 Figure notes 1 Port Circuit Pack 4 Input to Information Outlet 2 Media Gateway Connector Pins Ge Pall Modutanty 3 Pair Modularity 5 Adjunct Power 3 Main Distribution Frame MDF 6 Output From Information Outlet Pins 3 Pair Modularity 4 Pair Modularity 7 Voice or Data Terminal Pins May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 225 Installing and Wiring Telephones Install the Queue Warning Indicator The connections for the queue warning indicator are the same as external ringing An AC indicator lamp such as a 21C49 can be used in a Uniform Call Distribution Direct Departmental Calling UCD DDC queue The lamp is connected to an information outlet The media gateway side of the MDF is connected to an analog line circuit pack located in a port carrier 1 Wire the queue warning indicator to the information outlet as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 224 and Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 201 May 2002 226 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies These links provide information and wiring examples
33. Auxiliary Cabinet 44 Check Circuit Packs 45 Correct Shipping Errors 45 Position the Media Gateway 45 Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional 46 Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment 46 Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway 46 Install Concrete Floor Mounting 47 Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting 47 Connect AC Power and Ground 49 Task List Connect AC power and ground 50 Power Requirements 50 Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 50 Grounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE 51 Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway De Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway 53 Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 5b Connect Small Battery Holdover 56 Connect Large Battery Holdover 57 Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 58 Connect AC Power 59 Connect DC Power and Ground 59 Task List Connect DC Power and Ground 59 Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit 60 Connect Power and Ground s 62 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires 64 Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets 64 Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground 64 Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet 65 Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems 65 Turn Circuit Breakers Off 65 Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways 66 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 7 Contents Connect DC B
34. Between Media Gateway and MDF 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF Install a self adhesive port label on the back of each connector on the connector cable Position the labels so the media gateway connector retainers do not cover them At the rear of the media gateway connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector Route the cable down the rear of the media gateway through the cable slack manager and to the MDF At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block connector Store the cable slack in the cable slack manager Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 157 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF Auxiliary equipment that connects to the MDF can be mounted inside the Auxiliary cabinet The equipment connects to an ED 1E1443 10 Group 1 intraconnection panel mounted in the cabinet This intraconnection panel consists of a 110 type 100 pair wiring block Auxiliary equipment is connected to the 110 type wiring block The wiring block is pre wired to four 25 pair female connectors mounted on the outside rear of the cabinet 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF Instal
35. Cable to 48 VDC Return Bus Connect Black DC Power Cable to 48 VDC Bus Inset Applies to 48 VDC Buses and 48 VDC Return Buses Battery cabinet DC Power Cables Red and Black May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 93 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect Optional Battery Leads To prevent the internal batteries from discharging the Control media gateway is shipped with the battery leads disconnected 1 Set the circuit breakers OFF See Expansion Control Media Gateway Battery Location Right Side on page 93 Connect the battery leads The battery is near the top of the carrier toward the front right The battery leads are located next to the battery and are accessible from the front of the media gateway Expansion Control Media Gateway Battery Location Right Side gt THE 4 3LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Battery Battery Lead Connector Circuit Breakers Located Between plates Media Gateway Single Point Ground Block May 2002 94 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways A CAUTION 8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable code at the installation site gt NOTE Before conne
36. Distribution Unit The J58890CG is required if the distance between the DC Power cabinet s is greater than 30 feet 9 m Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit on page 90 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power system containing a DC power distribution unit DC Power Connections with DC Distribution Unit A 10 foot 3 meter power cord is equipped with the appropriate connectors In the configuration shown in Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit on page 90 each DC power cabinet stack has a DC Power Distribution Unit associated with it Stacking DC Power Cabinets Up to 3 DC power cabinets can be stacked to supply power to media gateway stacks See DC Power Cabinet Stack Rear on page 91 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Typical DC Power Connections 9 pm e S Ap Q2 GQ peoo Q9 pcd dc2 PDH 101596 Figure notes 1 N Oo 0 FF O NM co 10 11 12 Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet White Wires Green Ground Wires and Black Wires Connect to the 48 VDC Return Bus 48 VDC Bus Connect White Wires to Circuit Breakers DC Power Cable H600 436 G1 to Power Connector on Each Media Gateway Cut to Length and Crimp a Ring Terminal Onto Each Wire 30 Feet
37. ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0206 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0206 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0207 ETR PT 42 PASS press CANCEL to quit press NEXT PAGE to continue E Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs S8700 Multi Connect only Check each Expansion Interface EI circuit pack in the media gateway 1 Type test board UUCSS where UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot for an Expansion Interface EI circuit pack in the media gateway and press Enter gt NOTE Labels on the port network and carrier and on the strip under the circuit pack contain this information 2 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Sample Test Results for Expansion Interface Board 2A01 58700 Multi Connect This example is for board 2201 3 If any result is FAIL check the connections for the fiber optic link 4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Expansion Interface circuit pack May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Sample Test Results for Expansion Interface Board 2A01 S8700 Multi Connect 7 Port 02A01 02A01 02A01 02A01 02A01 02A01 X Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF TEST RESULTS 237 238 240 241 244 316 Result PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code UN Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network Check each TDM bus for each Port Network PN in the configu
38. Expanded Power Distribution Unit 232 Power Up and Test the Power Supply 233 Wire the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit 234 Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit 236 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 236 Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 236 Using 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 237 Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies 238 May 2002 12 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch 238 P333T PWR Important Safety Instructions 239 Connect the P333T PWR 240 Using the P333T PWR 241 Connect the Hardware 242 Connect Server UPS and IPSI cables to Ethernet Switch es 242 Connect Avaya SCC1 media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables 243 Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs 249 Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 249 Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway 250 Program the IPSI circuit packs 254 Using DHCP addressing 255 Using static addressing 257 Verify connectivity to the media servers 260 Completing the Installation Administration 261 Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary 261 Upgrade Cajun Ethernet Switch Firmware if necessary 262 Verify translations 262 Enable and Disable Ethernet Switch Ports 262 View alarms 263 Back up the media server 264 Release busied out media server 265 Register the S8700 Multi Connect configura
39. FROM media gateway down into the cable trays of each PN media gateway Connect the cables to the lightwave transceiver just installed on the TO media gateway 7 Connect the fiber that comes from the TX connector of the FROM transceiver to the RX connector of the TO transceiver and vice versa 8 Route the cables through the media gateway and through cable organizers as provided Secure the cables to the cable tie rack Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 74 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between the EI and SNI on PNI is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 1 If no running list is available use the outer slots first in alternating order Connect the first 2 SNI slots to 3 and 20 the left most and right most of the unused slots Next use 4 and 19 and so forth 2 Addlinks to the PNs in alternating order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth May 2002 74 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 9 9 Oo Oo LI NSSSSS P SS LUU SS 19 LUU SS C O a a cs C O amp 39 a E a F cI i ECL ramm H Ca cI Caa p Dee LUU NN
40. Gateway B A Ground plate 2 Media Gateway A 5 Lower rear cover 3 Upper rear cover 2 Unseatthe TN2312AP and TN775D circuit packs in the SCC1 media gateway A For high critical reliability configurations unseat the TN2312AP circuit pack in SCC1 media gateway B 3 With the red line on the bottom pin 1 attach one end of the short ribbon cable to the connector on the component side of the TN2312AP IPSI circuit pack 4 Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place May 2002 244 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware cadsinst LJK 030102 5 Thread the ribbon through the slot on the front panel 6 Attach the other end of the short ribbon cable to the bottom connector on the component side of the TN775D maintenance circuit pack red line on the bottom May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 245 Connect the Hardware N eo E o ceo eo MM 3 x x o 3 o L7 E c o Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place Thread the ribbon through the lower slot on the faceplate of the TN775D circuit pack For high or critical reliability configuration use the pass through tool to feed the long ribbon cable through media gateway A May 2002 246 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connect the Har
41. Media Gateway on page 68 shows a power and ground layout for a mixed AC DC power cabinet configuration in the same equipment room with the first media gateway being DC powered and the next media gateway being AC powered If a third media gateway is part of the 58700 Multi Connect configuration use the same basic connections May 2002 68 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Power and Ground for a Mixed AC DC Powered Media Gateway 9 48V RTN cydfacdi KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 DC power supply Ground Discharge Bar Approved Ground 1 AWG up to 50 feet 15 2m or engineered for less than 0 5 volt drop per conductor To Coupled Bonding Conductor terminal block at Main Distribution Frame Coupled Bonding Conductor Media Gateway ground block AC power distribution unit o co nN Oo oO F WO ND AC power cord e AC power source May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 69 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Remote Power Off Cable Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 on page 70 shows the location of the Remote Power Off RPO cable The opposite end of the cable connects to the Emergency Power Off EPO switch located outside of the equipment room Even though the equipment room EPO switch disconnects main AC power
42. Module Installation pcdfrec KLC 101196 Figure notes 1 Install Battery Interface Unit into Slot 1 2 Install Rectifier Modules into Slots 2 5 3 Rectifier Module 3 in Slot 4 4 Test Points 5 Main Circuit Breakers May 2002 62 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Power and Ground s Have a qualified electrician connect and route wires from the AC load center to the dedicated electrical outlet for the power distribution unit 1 C N Connect 1 end of a 6 AWG 40 16 mm cabinet GROUND wire to the ground terminal block at the bottom rear of the cabinet See Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram on page 63 Route the cabinet GROUND wire to the AC load center single point ground and connect Connect each remaining media gateway to the AC load center single point ground Power Distribution Unit J58890CH V AV pcdf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 o a A WO N J Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery cabinet to J20 Carrier Circuit Breakers Ground Terminal Block Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 1 AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to large battery cabinet For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative Ground Terminal Block To AC load center or approved single point gr
43. Premises Station Wiring The local telephone company provides cabling outside the building for off premises stations The off premises stations can appear on any of the RJ21X network interfaces provided for the Central Office CO trunks CAUTION Only an FCC approved or equivalent analog type telephone such as a 2500 type can be used as an off premises station The TN746B and TN2183 Analog Line circuit packs can be connected to off premises stations 1 Install an A25D male to male cable between the RJ21X network interface and a sneak fuse panel 2 Atthe Main Distribution Frame MDF connect jumper wires between one row connecting block in the green field and up to three rows connecting blocks in the purple field to concentrate the analog line pairs 3 Connectan A25D cable between the sneak fuse panel and the terminal block connector associated with the green row in the previous step 4 Install a green label on the terminal block to identify the remote location 5 Administer per the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Out of building campus stations are telephones not physically located in the same building as the equipment room but located on the same property Only analog telephones connected to TN742 TN746B TN2183 or TN769 Analog Line circuit packs can be installed out of building Off Premises Connections Connections for 1 to 8 Out of Building Analog T
44. RFA Application 3 Complete the information necessary to create and deliver license and authentication files May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 19 Mount the Hardware in the Rack Mount the Hardware in the Rack Refer to Getting Started with Avaya 88700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration for installation information May 2002 20 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack Configure the Hardware in the Rack This section covers the following tasks Configure the Media Servers on page 20 Configure the UPSs on page 33 Configure the Ethernet Switch es on page 35 Configure the Media Servers Once the hardware is installed you must configure the two media servers install the license and authentication files and test the connectivity to the customer s LAN You configure the first media server then configure the second media server Using a services laptop computer connected to the services laptop interface default is port 2 Ethernet 1 access the Media Server Web Interface program resident on each media server for the configuration and some of the other administration For other administration access the Media Server either through Avaya Site Administration or by opening a telnet session establishing a Linux shell session This section covers the following tasks Configure Media Server 1 on page 21 Install license and Avaya authent
45. Ring Emergency Terminal 2 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 3 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 3 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 3 Ring CO Line Port 3 Tip PBX Line Port 3 Ring PBX Line Port 3 Tip Emergency Terminal 3 Ring Emergency Terminal 3 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 4 May 2002 220 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector Continued 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 G BK BK BR BR BK BK S S BK Y BL BL Y Y O O Y Y G G Y Y BR BR Y Y S S Y V BL BL V V O O V V G G V V BR BR V V S S V RTC4 TTK4 RTK4 TLC4 RLC4 TST4 RST4 TTCS RTC5 TTK5 RTK5 TLCS RLC5 TST5 RST5 COMI NOI NC2 NCI COM2 NO2 GRD 48PX Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 4 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 4 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 4 Tip PBX Line Port 4 Ring PBX Line Port 4 Tip Emergency Terminal 4 Ring Emergency Terminal 4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 5 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 5 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 5 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 5 Tip PBX Line Port 5 Ring PBX Line Port 5 Tip Emergency Terminal 5 Ring Emergency Terminal 5 Common 1 Relay Contact Normally Open 1 Contact Normally Closed 2 Contact Normally Closed 1 Contact Common 2 Relay Contact Normally Open 2 Contact Ground from Aux Cable 48V from AUX Cable May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 221 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency T
46. Typical Connections to Stratum 3 Clock 9 el 1 9 9 amp GO Desi ke Figure notes oN O oO Aa WO NM SCCI Cabinet PN A Position B Position H600 307 Cable H600 247 G2 Cable 1300 Feet 396 m B25A Male to Female Cable Channel Service Unit Secondary 10 11 12 13 14 15 cydfst3 LUK 101596 Channel Service Unit Primary Stratum 3 Clock Main Distribution Frame MDF DS1 E1 Interface Circuit Pack DS1 Tie Trunk Circuit Pack DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Tone Clock Circuit Pack May 2002 112 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Install the Stratum 3 clock Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring 1 Connect the B25A cables from the TN780 connector panel slot on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration cabinet and the Stratum 3 Clock to the cross connect module in the yellow field Connect the CSU plug end of the H 600 274 Y cable to the primary CSU Route an H600 307 cable from the DS1 connector panel slot on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration cabinet to the connector on the S8700 Multi Connect configuration end of the Y cable Route a B25A cable from the CLOCK end of the Y cable to the cross connect module in the yellow field Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary CSU The maximum allowable cabling distance between
47. Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply A WARNING Important Safety Instructions follow When operating this equipment basic safety precautions must be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and personal injury including the following Read and understand all instructions Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces e For continued back up protection and battery reliability replace batteries every four years Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the products Clean products only with a dry rag Do not use this product near water For mounting security follow all installation instructions when mounting product Openings on top and bottom of power unit are provided for ventilation Do not block or cover these openings Do not exceed recommended environmental temperatures e Operate these products only from the type of power source indicated on the product labels The power unit is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug Do not allow anything to rest on or spill into the products To reduce risk of fire and electrical shock do not overload power ou
48. a 258A or BR2580A adapter as shown in 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity on page 141 The 4 pair station cables connect the adapter to the information outlets The 4 pair station cables can be run directly from the equipment room to the information outlets if 4 pair terminal blocks are used in the distribution field See 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location on page 142 The station cables must be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks If 110 type terminal blocks are used with a modular plug ended station cable an adapter can be connected directly to the 110 type terminal block connectors See 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location on page 142 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution 3 Pair to 4 Pair Satellite Location Connectivity on page 143 shows the 3 pair circuit distribution from an equipment room MDF to a satellite location using 110 type hardware Four pair circuits are distributed from the satellite location to the information outlets May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 141 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Three pair circuits can also be run directly from the equipment room MDF to a 356A adapter as shown in 3 Pair to 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity on page 144 Four pair station cables connect the adapter to the information outlets Four pair station cables can be run directly from a satellite lo
49. a terminal emulation mode which is directly equivalent to using SAT commands on a dumb terminal or through a Telnet session ASA also supports a whole range of other features including the GEDI and Data Import For more information refer to the Help Guided Tour and Show Me accessed from the ASA Help menu May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 271 Testing the Complete Configuration Testing the Complete Configuration This section provides tests for the complete configuration including the control and bearer networks and the telephones and consoles This section provides tests to e review the status of the configuration e test the duplication link to the media servers test the IP server interfaces expansion interfaces and TDM buses in the port networks e test the telephones and other equipment These tests verify that the Time Division Multiplexing TDM cables terminators and the Inter Cabinet Cables MCC1 Media Gateway work If a FAIL Result code is seen check these cables If problems persist refer to the maintenance book for your configuration See LED Indicators for information regarding the LED status indicators for the media servers Cajun Ethernet switch es UPSs and different circuit packs gt NOTE Circuit pack positions are usually given by cabinet carrier and slot They may also be given by port The term cabinet refers to an MCC1 Media Gateway making up one to five port networks or a s
50. and recognized by the software 1 Type list configuration all and press Enter 2 Verify the screen displays list configuration similar to Sample System Configuration Screen Page 4 8700 Multi Connect Make sure the software is communicating with each circuit pack except power supply circuit packs Do not attempt to correct any problems until after the diagnostic tests that you run later in the configuration tests 3 Note any boards with a VINTAGE column entry of NO BOARD or CONFLICT 4 Auindicates unassigned ports and a number indicates the port has been translated May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Sample System Configuration Screen Page 4 S8700 Multi Connect list configuration all Page aN SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p psa 01B01 IP SERVER INTFC TN2312AP HW33 FW045 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01B02 EXPANSION INTRFC TN570C 000002 01B03 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000020 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 u 01B05 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000020 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 u 01B06 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000006 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 u u NC press CANC
51. and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only These procedures test the ability of the Stratum 3 clock to correctly provide timing and alarms to the media server A CAUTION The following procedures are destructive to DS1 data and should not be attempted while DS1 facilities are active Check for Red LEDs 1 Turnon the Stratum 3 clock and wait 40 50 seconds to allow the system to complete the on board diagnostics before checking LEDs 2 If there are any red LEDs follow the procedures in Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Card LED Label Procedure PAI REF A Check that the CI circuit pack on the left is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier A which connects the media gateway to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI REF B Check that the CI circuit pack on the right is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier B which connects the media gateway to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI STA Replace the ST3 card PAI ST B Replace the ST3 card May 2002
52. and trunks May 2002 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect 107 Install the Stratum 3 clock Install the Stratum 3 clock o ON OO oa F WO DY e Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 107 Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 107 Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 107 Check and Connect Commercial AC Power on page 108 Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 108 Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding on page 108 Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power on page 108 Set the Clock Options on page 109 Cable the Stratum 3 Clock on page 110 Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring on page 112 Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the cardboard container If the container has been jarred or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating possible damage Remove all packing material Remove front door and rear screw on panels from the cabinet Inspect the cabinet for damage Report any damage per local instructions Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Check the location of the AC power receptacle The receptacle must be on a separately fused circuit that is not controlled by a wall switch It must be located within 10 ft 3 m of the cabinet and should be located outside the
53. from the alarm wires to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack gt NOTE It is recommended that the RFA ACF and BIF alarm leads be connected to the major alarm device and the BOD alarm leads be connected to the minor alarm device 5 Connect the major and minor alarm devices to the appropriate cross connect pins on the MDF 6 Administer the alarms using the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software May 2002 206 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones External Alarm Connector Pinout Pin Designation Definition 26 Not Used 1 Not Used 27 Not Used 2 Not Used 28 Not Used 3 Not Used 29 Not Used 4 Not Used 30 Not Used 5 Not Used 31 Not Used 6 Not Used 32 Not Used 7 Not Used 33 RFA2 Rectifier Failure positive 8 RFA2 Rectifier Failure negative 34 ACF2 AC Failure positive 9 ACF2 AC Failure negative 35 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure positive 10 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure negative 36 BOD2 Battery On Discharge positive 11 BOD2 Battery On Discharge negative 37 Not Used 12 RXD Receive Data 38 TXD Transmit Data 13 DTR Data Terminal Ready 39 RS 232 GRD RS 232 Ground 14 DSR Data Set Ready 40 RTS Request To Send 15 Not Used May 2002 External Alarm Connector Pinout Continued Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Pin Designation Definition 41 Not Used 1
54. in violation of Part 68 rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when answered by the called station answered by the attendant or routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all direct inward dialed DID calls forwarded back to the public switched tele phone network Permissible exceptions are Acallis unanswered A busy tone is received e A reorder tone is received Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices tha
55. information from the media server and update itself correctly Type change system parameters ipserver interface and press Enter A hange system parameters ipserver interface Page SERVER INFORMATION OPTIONS l of m IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS IPSI Host Name Prefix vodka Primary Control Subnet Address 198 152 254 0 Secondary Control Subnet Address 198 152 255 0 Switch Identifier A IPSI Control of Port Networks disabled S zi N Verify that the Primary and Secondary if equipped Subnet Addresses are correct The subnet in these fields should match the most significant 3 octets of the Server IP address on control network entry from the Pre Installation Network Worksheet If there is an Asterisk to the right of the Subnet Address fields it means that the Avaya MultiVantage call processing software does not contain the subnet information displayed After verifying the displayed information submitting this form will cause the Avaya MultiVantage software to be updated with the subnet information displayed May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 39 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Ad CAUTION If the information displayed in the Primary and Secondary Subnet Adaress fields is not correct it must be changed on the servers Use the Configure Server entry on the S8700 Media Server Web Interface to change the server configuration Then return here to perform this step 3 Verify
56. installed partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 If a horizontal patch cord trough is to be installed install it on the line between the trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field To install the first distribution field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 in 12 wood screws 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm apart on the line to the right of the vertical patch cord trough Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 May 2002 11 12 13 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 159 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration If installing another distribution field terminal block partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm to right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 If installing a vertical patch cord trough in the distribution field repeat Step 6 Repeat Steps 11 and 12 until all the terminal blocks and vertical patch cord troughs in the distribution field are installed 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair 1758420b MMR 031496 Figure notes a AB o N
57. is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor 3 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor The TN2302AP IP Media Processor is now installed in the media gateway and connected to the IP network TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL The TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL is an integrated announcement circuit pack that offers up to 1 hour of announcement storage capacity e requires shorter backup and restore times e is firmware downloadable plays announcements over the TDM bus e has 33 ports including dedicated telephone port for recording and playing back announcements port number 1 ethernet port port number 33 31 playback ports ports 2 32 10 100 Mb Ethernet interface allowing announcement and firmware file portability over your LAN FIP server functions supports wav announcement files May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 179 Connecting to the Customer s Network Important File Specifications Voice Announcement over LAN VAL requires that announcement files are in the following wav formats e CCITT A Law or CCITT p Law mu Law companding format do not use PCM e 8 kHz sample rate e 8 bit resolution bits per sample Mono channels 1 You must convert other
58. must be identified with a grounding tag FORM 15657NR or equivalent See Approved Grounds jj May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 65 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet CAUTION Power is present in the cabinet even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the cabinet when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the cabinet 1 Ensure the associated circuit breakers at the AC power panel are OFF 2 Have an electrician connect AC power leads to the rectifiers using the instructions provided with the rectifiers in the DC Power cabinet Each rectifier should have its own branch circuit Terminate leads on the AC INPUT terminal block of each rectifier Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems CAUTION Do not connect any ground wires between cabinets All ground wires must be terminated at the single point ground block at the main AC supply AC mains 1 Connect a6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the first cabinet ground terminal block 2 Route the wire to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 3 Connecta 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the each of the other cabinets ground terminal block 4 Route the wire s to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 5 Connecta 6 AWG 40 wire to the DC battery cabinet and DC power cabinet 6 Route wires to the AC mains single point ground block and connect them
59. must be installed as the only protection on the line entering the building For the 4C3S 75 protector there are a variety of 25 50 and 100 pair protector panels equipped with 110 type connecting blocks and or RJ21X connectors Installing the Data Link Protector The maximum range for out of building digital telephones is 3400 feet when using 24 AWG 5 0 5 mm wire and 2200 feet 670 m when using 26 AWG 4 0 4 mm wire The range can be extended to 5000 feet 1524 m using 24 AWG 5 0 5 mm wire or 4000 feet 1220 m using 26 AWG 4 0 4 mm wire with the use of a data link protector The protector is an isolating transformer used to remove phantom power on the media gateway side and re introduce it on the terminal side When a protector is used the telephone must be locally powered by an external power supply or through the AC power cord provided with some telephones The protector is installed on the equipment side of the protection in both buildings Refer to Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 201 and Connections at Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 214 Digital Voice Circuit Protectors Enhanced Primary Protector Circuit Pack With Sneak Current Protection TN754 V13 or earlier ITW Linx Only TN754 V14 or later 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN754B all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2181 all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2224 all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx May 2002 214 Installing
60. network digital interfaces throughout the Euro pean Union Analogue Connections The equipment described in this document can be connected to the network analogue interfaces throughout the following member states Belgium Germany Greece Italy Netherlands Bpain United Kingdom Luxemburg LASER Product The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1 LASER Device s if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote expansion port network EPN The LASER devices operate within the following parameters Maximum power output 5 dBm to 8 dBm Center Wavelength 1310 nm to 1360 nm CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 60825 1 1998 Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo sure Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product infor mation To order copies of this and other documents Call Avaya Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 or 1 410 568 3680 FAX 1 800 457 1764 or 1 410 891 0207 Write Globalware Solutions 200 Ward Hill Avenue Haverhill MA 01835 USA Attention Avaya Account Management E mail totalware gwsmail com Contents Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration 15 Pre installation Setup 16 Downloading License and Authentica
61. of installation procedures for the 1145B22 and 1151A1 1151A2 power supplies These are examples only and actual wiring procedures may vary at each site gt NOTE Refer to the Installation and Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage DEFINITY Server to install the necessary peripheral equipment Power supplies include e 1145B22 Power Supply on page 226 e 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies on page 236 P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch on page 238 1145B22 Power Supply The 1145B22 closet power arrangement provides an uninterruptible 48 VDC power source with battery and 1146B2 distribution unit for ISDN DCP terminal equipment adjuncts and other customer supplied equipment During AC power interruptions batteries automatically provide power to the load gt NOTE Before you begin read this Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply on page 227 Perform these tasks in order 1 Install the Wall Mounting Plates on page 231 Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on page 231 Install the Battery Mounting Wiring on page 232 Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 232 Power Up and Test the Power Supply on page 233 Wire the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on page 234 0o 0 25 WO I Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit on page 236 May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 227 Installing and
62. on page 60 Connect the 48 volt RTN return wire to the ground discharge bar Route the wires out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the first media gateway May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 67 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 5 Connectthe 48 volt DC wire to the 48VDC terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit 6 Connect the 48 volt RTN wire to the 48RTN terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit terminal block 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each cabinet and auxiliary cabinet in the system Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet gt NOTE The wire in the next step must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Turn off the main circuit breaker on the DC battery cabinet 2 Turn off the main circuit breaker on the DC power cabinet 3 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC battery cabinet s 48 Volt DC terminal to a DC OUTPUT distribution bus on the DC power cabinet 4 Atthe DC battery cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the 48 VDC connector 5 Route the wire out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the DC power cabinet 6 Atthe DC power cabinet terminate the 48 volt DC wire on a DC OUTPUT distribution bus Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground Typical Power and Ground for a Mixed AC DC Powered
63. or 230 VAC 15 amp feeder Use only unswitched outlets outlets not connected to a wall switch 2 Secure the wall mounting plates to a standard 3 4 inch 2 cm thick plywood mounting board Each mounting plate comes with four 10 x 1 2 inch wood screws 3 The 1145B2 Power Supply is snap fit onto the bottom wall mounting plate without tools 4 Aninstaller provided insulated ground wire 16 AWG 12 1 2 mm or greater is required to connect the power supply frame ground lug to an approved ground The frame ground screw is located next to the AC outlet to the left of the unit Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit See the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit in Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 230 1 Insert and securely tighten the two supplied 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws they have an unthreaded section at the top into the top holes designated for 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on the bottom plate Mount the unit on these two shoulder screws using the key holes on the back of the unit 2 Secure the unit by inserting the 48 32 x 1 inch screw through the bottom of the unit just above the wire clips into the plate and tighten 3 Setthe battery back up switch option to the 1 32 down position to provide battery back up to all outputs 4 Connect the power distribution unit to the power supply with the power cable Refer to the power supply s right hand label to locate the output power connection May 2002 23
64. or adjuncts is 32 at less than or equal to 6 25 watts each The 1145B22 is required for installations outside the United States Auxiliary power local or bulk is always required for the following e Attendant Console 302C1 e Any 8520 terminal e Any 7500 or 8500 series terminal with an asynchronous data module e Any 7500 series terminal whether in passive bus or point to point one per BRI port e Any 8510 terminal in passive bus or with an asynchronous data module unless the 8510 will not be used to support data or video e Passage Way adapter interface e Some 8400 series terminal and adjuncts Some 7400 series terminal and adjuncts May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement 1149 Battery 1145 Power Unit On Battery Reserve Charging Battery Output Power On 1146 Power Distribution Unit 0000000000000000 Figure notes A O N Wall Mounting Plate Battery 1149B Shown 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit 1145B2 Power Unit 0003_1 PDH 062596 Power Cable Unswitched Outlet 120 VAC 20 Amp or 230 VAC 15 Amp Battery Backup Switch Setting May 2002 229 230 Installing the 88700 Multi Conne
65. route the cord to an appropriate AC outlet using the clips provided on the unit gt NOTE A maximum of four power supplies can be powered from one dedicated 100V 120V 50 60 Hz 20 amp feeder or 200V 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Amp feeder Use only unswitched outlets 2 Plug the cord into the outlet This powers up the power supply May 2002 234 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Check AC operation of the 1145B2 Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS Green and yellow LEDs at front of the unit should be lit together Green means the power supply is providing power Yellow means the battery is being charged After the battery reaches full charge maximum of twenty hours the yellow LED should go out FAIL If either green or yellow LED is not lit after powering up check the connections Test the AC outlet If power is available and the AC power cord and connections are good replace the power unit Disconnect the AC plug on the power supply this activates the DC supply Check DC battery back up operation of the 1145B2 Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS The red and green LEDs should be lit together Red means the power supply is on battery back up FAIL If either green or red LED is not lit after disconnecting AC power check the connections If the connections are good replace the power unit or batteries Reconnect AC power to the power supply Wire the 1146B2 P
66. supply 1 Power down AUDIX and any other circuit pack that might be running an application 2 Power down the media gateway 3 Release both latches on the power supply and slide the unit out of the media gateway 4 Observe the ring frequency switch label on the side of the power supply and locate the switch on the bottom 5 Set the ring frequency select switch to the appropriate frequency setting 6 Slide the power supply back into the slot and ensure that both latches snap closed Connect the Power Cord into the Power Receptacle 1 Provide one receptacle per media gateway 2 Verify that the circuit breakers are OFF 3 Plugthe media gateway AC power cord into the AC power receptacle on the rear of each media gateway 4 Plug the opposite end of each AC power cord into the appropriate AC power receptacle in the equipment room gt NOTE Loop the excess cord and tie wrap it to the back cover to prevent accidental unplugging Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables 1 Locate the white fabric covered Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cable on the rear of the media gateways Remove the TDM Bus Terminator from Slot 18 of the expansion control media gateway A J58890N and move it to Slot 17 on port media gateway B J58890H See Connections for Media Gateway Stacks on page 97 Connect the supplied TDM Bus Cables WP 91716 L3 as shown Repeat for each port media gateway in the stack May 2002 Installing the
67. that the Switch Identifier is set correctly for this installation It is critical that the correct Switch Identifier is entered here before TN2312 IPSI circuit packs are administered in the next procedure 4 Press Enter to submit the form Add IPSI translations to MultiVantage software gt NOTE Adding IPSI translations is only required if bulk translations including the IPSI translations were not entered earlier However it is recommended that connectivity to the IPSIs be tested no matter how the translations were entered See Test Connectivity to IPserver interface circuit packs on page 40 1 Type add ipserver interface Port Network e ipserver interface 8 Page 1 of in IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 8 Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 8AXX Call Control 802 1p 6 Host ipsi A08a Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi A08a Secondary IPSI Location 8B01 Host ipsi A08b DHCP ID ipsi A08b EN A 2 Verify that the fields associated with the Primary and Secondary if equipped are populated with default data The Host and DHCP ID fields are set by the DHCP server 3 Press Enter to submit the form Repeat the add ipserver interface Port Network for each IPSI controlled Port Network May 2002 40 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack Test Connectivity to IPserver interface circuit packs The following procedure is pe
68. the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed Tf liquid has been spilled into the product e If the product has been exposed to rain or water Ifthe product was dropped or the housing has been damaged e If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions May 2002 240 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Connect the P333T PWR Power up AC input 1 Insert the power cord into the power connector BUPS or Power Supply on the rear of the unit See Figure psdlups KLC 032002 Figure notes 1 BUPSconnector 2 ACoconnector 2 Insert the other end of the power cord into the electricity supply or the connector on the BUPS The unit powers up and performs a self test procedure The LEDs flash at regular intervals after the self test procedure is completed successfully Power up DC input optional The P333T PWR can operate on the AC input only However you may wish to use the optional DC input for the following Backup for the Power over Ethernet ports To provide more than 200W for the P
69. the top of the main menu 10 Click Configure Server to open the first page of the Configure Server wizard 11 Select Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration and click Continue May 2002 24 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack 12 Click through the Review Notices to get to the Set Server Identities page Configure Server Progress Set Server Identities Review Notices Server names must be unique Copy Settings Set Identities Host Name server Configure Interfaces Configure Switches Plast Mattie hele Set DNS DHCP Host Name active server Set Static Routes This is server 1 gt Configure Time Server SHLMIQUBIRRSITRER Indicate how each ethernet port is to be used You may accept the Update System defaults Ethernet ports may be used for multiple purposes except for the port assigned to the laptop which must be dedicated to only that purpose Physical connections to the Ethernet ports must match these settings 1 Control Network A Ethernet D Default Ethernet D 2 Services Port Ethemet 1 Default Ethernet 1 3 Server Duplication Link Ethernet 2 Default Ethernet 2 4 Control Network B Ethemet 3 Default Ethernet 3 5 Corporate LAN Ethernet 4 Default Ethernet 4 Click CONTINUE to proceed Continue About This Screen gt NOTE Most of the fields are populated with default settings Do not change the default
70. the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections at Trunk Auxiliary Field 1758482b RBP 062696 Figure notes 1 To Network Interface Facility 3 One Pair of Wires 2 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Connector 4 Twenty fifth Pair of RJ21X Network Interface Jack Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones An 808A Emergency Transfer Panel mounted next to the trunk auxiliary field provides emergency transfer capability You can use 500 and 2500 series analog telephones either for emergency transfer or as normal extensions For emergency transfer connect the phones directly to the 808A for normal extensions wire them through the 808A Analog Central Office CO and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS trunks can provide emergency transfer capability The 808A Emergency Transfer Panel provides emergency trunk bypass or power fail transfer for up to five incoming Central Office CO trunk loops to five selected station sets The 808A equipment s Ringer Equivalency Number REN is 1 0A At the Main Distribution Frame MDF the unit is controlled by a connection to a yellow terminal row connecting block in the trunk auxiliary field The unit is controlled by 48 VDC from the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminals There are seven EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal pairs that allow powering of up to seven transfer units Should power be restored to the relays while a call connected through the 808A is in pro
71. the Front Mounting Angle using the four supplied 12 24 x 1 2 inch 1 27 cm thread forming screws See Front Mounting Angle Location on page 82 Lay the supplied Stiffener on the bottom rear of the media gateway and align with the holes in the bottom of the media gateway See Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View on page 81 Slide a nylon washer onto each of the two supplied long hex head bolts Insert the bolts through the Stiffener and thread into the concrete floor anchor Tighten securely Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View 9 il 9 1781851a CJL 030796 LA Figure notes A OO N Media Gateway Media Gateway Foot Nylon Insulating Washer 2 Required Long Hex Head Bolt 2 Required Floor Plugs Remove Concrete Floor Anchor N O C Stiffener Concrete Floor May 2002 82 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Front Mounting Angle Location 9 Il r781854a CJL 030896 Figure notes 1 12 24x1 2 inch Thread Forming Screw Media Gateway A Front Mounting Angle Hex Head Bolt Nylon Insulating Washer Concrete Floor N Oo 0 25 WO I Concrete Floor Anchor May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 83 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground DC power media gateways A CAUTION 8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding shall comply with the ge
72. the customer or marketing representative See Port Assignment Record Form on page 150 These forms contain the port assignments and identify the extension numbers Terminal No of the telephones voice terminals Enter the jack assignments at the equipment room and indicate if adjunct power is required and where it is provided MDF site satellite closet or information outlet When satellite locations are provided enter the satellite letter designation A through F and the jack appearance in the equipment room on the form Also enter the floor designation and or building designation if appropriate For 1 point administration this entry is all that is required The white label identifying the terminal block row associated with circuits 17 to 24 connects to an identically labeled terminal block row at the satellite closet See Example 3 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet on page 151 This is always the case for either 1 point or 2 point administration The satellite symbol must be installed at all connection points between the blue field and the information outlet It must also be installed at the information outlet itself Example 4 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet on page 152 shows an example labeling scheme for 4 pair circuits from the equipment room to the information outlets The labeling scheme for 3 pair circuits from the MDF to a satellite location Port Assignment Record Form CARRIER PORT ASSIG
73. the label name and range of each label Cable Connector Building Label Ordering Information on page 131 provides label ordering information Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector on page 131 shows the proper way to install a label on a 25 pair cable connector Install the label near the rear of the connector so it is not obscured by the media gateway connector retainers It can also be installed on the skin of the cable near the connector May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 129 Cable Installation Cable Routing Guidelines Cable Routing to Top Terminal Blocks on page 131 and Cable Routing to Bottom Terminal Blocks on page 132 show typical cable routing from the media gateway to the top and bottom of the MDF respectively Use these guidelines when routing cables from the media gateway to the MDF Following these guidelines will maximize use of the cable slack managers and make future cabling additions and changes easier e Connect each port cable at the media gateway and then route it along the front trough of the cable slack manager to the connecting terminal block where the cable is terminated Leave enough slack at the media gateway end of the cable to allow for proper dressing of the cables Route the cable from the media gateway to the wall Place the cable beside 1 of the rows of columns in the cable slack manager gt NOTE Retainers mounted on the columns keep the c
74. the rack or a media gateway The location of equipment inside the auxiliary cabinet is specified in the Customer Service Document CSD 2 If earthquake protection is required refer to Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 46 3 Ifearthquake protection is not required level the auxiliary cabinet and adjust and lock its stabilizing bolts to keep it from moving Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment The auxiliary cabinet allows for carrier 23 in 58 4 cm rack or panel mounting of the hardware The following equipment is furnished with the media gateway e Fuse panel Distributes 48 VDC power to fused cabinet circuits Power receptacle strip Provides switched and un switched 120 VAC receptacles e DC connector block Required when the auxiliary cabinet is powered by an external DC source AC to DC power supply Converts AC power provided by the AC power strip switched outlet to the required DC voltage Install equipment inside the media gateway as specified in the CSD The following optional equipment can be installed e 909A B Universal Coupler Fan Assembly Requires 120 VAC power External Channel Service Unit CSU 1 is required for each T1 carrier link e PagePac Paging System 3 models are available All PagePac models require 120 VAC power External system announcement units may be powered by either 48V DC or 120 VAC Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gatew
75. the subsequent pages gt NOTE Configure Ethernet Interfaces Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Configure Time Server Set Modem Interface Update System The server is not configured until you click Continue on the Update System page 17 When you complete all the fields the Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes it The last line says System modifications completed 18 Scroll down to view the software release number If the software release is the expected release go to Verify media server 2 connection to customer s LAN on page 31 If it is not the expected release go to Upgrading Software on an Initial Installation of an Avaya S8700 Media Server Verify media server 2 connection to customer s LAN The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 using the 8700 Media Server Web Interface You also need a customer representative with knowledge of the customer s LAN configuration and access to a desktop on the non dedicated network 1 Connecta customer supplied CATS cable from media server 2 port Eth4 to the customer s LAN Refer to Getting Started with Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration 2 On the 8700 Media Server Web Interface click on Execute Ping 3 Have the customer enter a name if DNS is administered or IP address 4 Verify that the ping executes successfully and a response is
76. to the Customer s Network TN799DP Control LAN The TN799DP Control LAN circuit pack serves two purposes Aconnection for the signaling telephone network to the customer s data network for IP telephones e A source board for downloading firmware to circuit packs having the P designation AnIP interface for adjuncts such as Intuity Audix e An IP interface for DCS connection with another Avaya configuration See the Avaya MultiVantage Solutions Hardware Guide for more information Installing a TN799DP C LAN Installing the cables 1 Install a cable from the cabinet to the network through a hub or 110 purple wall field as required Connect the 259A adapter to the Amphenol connector corresponding to the slot that the C LAN circuit pack is in See Cable Connection for C LAN on page 170 For a pinout of TN799DP see TN799DP Pinout on page 170 May 2002 170 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Cable Connection for C LAN Figure notes 29 cadiclan KLC 031802 1 259A Connector 3 Tonetwork 2 DWS Cable TN799DP Pinout Peripheral Backplane Pin 25 Pair Wire Color Lead Name Connector Pin 103 White Orange TD 27 003 Orange White TD 2 104 White Green RD 28 004 Green White RD 3 Administering the TN799DP For administration refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Multi Vantage Software May 2002 Installing the 88700 Mult
77. to the equipment room it cannot disconnect the battery power from the J58890CH An auxiliary set of contacts inside the EPO are used for this function 1 Plug the RPO cable into the connector shown in Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 on page 70 2 Route the opposite end of the wires to the EPO switch The opposite end of the RPO cable connects to the internal relay gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly are customer provided A CAUTION The auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly must close when the switch is pressed This contact closure energizes the relay inside the power distribution unit causing the connection to the battery holdover assembly to open External Alarm Cable Connection on page 71 shows the cabling from the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly and how they connect to the internal relay 3 Connect the RPO wires to the auxiliary contacts on the EPO switch See External Alarm Cable Connection on page 71 gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts for the RPO connection are customer supplied May 2002 70 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 psdf002i KLC 012400 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 External Alarm Cable Connector RPO cable Circuit Breakers Pin 6 RPO Pin 2
78. use the Cable Running List that accompanies the 8700 Multi Connect configuration when installing fiber optic cables The following procedure is a typical example of how to cable a 8700 Multi Connect configuration If the media gateways are close together the signal may go through a single directly connected fiber optic cable If the media gateways are far apart it may be easier to connect the media gateways through an LIU or fiber shelf For each fiber indicated in the fiber optic Cable Running List 1 Install alightwave transceiver on the media gateway connector at the position in the FROM column in the running list 2 Selectacable indicated by the CABLE CODE and LENGTH in the running list Connect 1 of the fibers to each connector on the lightwave transceivers just installed The fiber is numbered 1 or 2 The connector on the transceiver is labeled TX or RX Keep track of which fiber connects to which transceiver connector Label both ends of these cables 3 Route the fiber optic cables from the transceiver out of the media gateway Secure the cables to the cable tie rack Keep the fiber optic cables clear of the heavier I O cables 4 Ifthe media gateway in the TO column in the running list is located remotely from the FROM media gateway connect to the TO media gateway by way of the LIU 5 Install a lightwave transceiver on the media gateway connector at the position in the TO column in the running list 6 Route the cables from the
79. 0 1000 0 3m 152m 305m 457m 610m 762m 914m OFF OFF lt gt ON OFF lt gt OFF ON lt gt ON ON lt gt NOTE Set switches 1 and 2 according to the distance from the Stratum 3 clock to the S8700 Media Server for Multi connect configuration Set switch 3 to ON Set switch 4 to OFF Cable the Stratum 3 Clock Typical Connections to Stratum 3 Clock on page 111 shows typical connections to a Stratum 3 Clock cabinet Connections are made through the yellow field cross connect A custom Y cable H600 274 connects the CSU to the DS1 circuit pack and taps off the input for the Stratum 3 Clock A resistor built into the cable to provide the necessary isolation between the S8700 Multi Connect configuration and the clock The Y cable plugs directly into the CSU and connects to standard cables for interface to the S8700 Multi Connect configuration and the yellow field on the MDF The H600 307 cable connects the 8700 Multi Connect configuration end of the Y cable to a DS circuit pack shown as TN464 2464 TN722 or TN767 The B25A cable connects the clock end of the Y cable to the yellow field on the MDF May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 111 Install the Stratum 3 clock
80. 1 1110A2 and 1110C1 Apparatus Mountings 1781401 LJK 040896 Figure notes 1 1110C1 Apparatus Mounting 4 88 5in 225 cm 2 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting 5 43 5in 110 5 cm 3 76in 193 cm Apparatus Mounting Frame Ordering Information Code Number Description Comcode 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame 104032495 1110C1 Cable Support Assembly 104175120 1110A1 End Dress Panel 104176268 2110A1 Top Dress Panel 104176276 2110B1 Bottom Dress Panel 104176284 May 2002 162 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Cable Slack Managers 1 Place the Z113A Cable Slack Manager against the wall under the MDF See Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC on page 163 Align the left side of the cable slack manager with the first terminal block of the trunk auxiliary field 2 Place the next cable slack manager beside the previously installed unit Align the tabs and interlocks and snap the units together 3 Repeat Step 2 until all cable slack managers are installed gt NOTE Nine 1 4 in holes 0 63 cm are provided in a cable slack manager base if earthquake mounting is required If a base is mounted on an uneven floor shims may be required for leveling and to assure proper fit of the covers Holes are provided in the sides of the base for bolting cable slack manager together Bolts and shims must be obtained locally 4 The S8700 Multi Connect conf
81. 10 TDM Bus Terminator Slot 17 6 AHFIIO TDM Bus Terminator 2 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN oem Pinfield Slot 17 7 Port Media Gateway D 3 TDM bus Cable WP 91716 L3 8 Port Media Gateway C 4 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN 9 Port Media Gateway B Ene COQUE 10 Expansion Control Media Gateway 5 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN A Pinfield Slot 17 May 2002 106 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya G700 Media Gateway Installing an Avaya G700 Media Gateway A Avaya G700 Media Gateway may be controlled by an 58700 Media Server for Multi Connect configurations A sample configuration is shown below For complete information on tasks and procedures required refer to Installation and Upgrades for Avaya G700 Media Gateway controlled by an Avaya 8700 Media Server Document number 555 234 100 Voice Mail cydcrbro LJK 032402 Figure notes 1 a Ff WA N S8700 Media Servers in a Multi Connect Configuration Ethernet Switch UPS units One for each media server MCC 1 Media Gateway 9 Dedicate LAN connectivity to IPSI board in the MCC1 Media Gateway 10 IP Phones off of the customer s LAN Voice Mail Connected via IP G700 Media Gateway connected via the LAN to the TN799DP C LAN board located in the MCCI Media Gateway DCP Phones Avaya Multi Function Digital Phones Analog connectivity Analog phones lines
82. 110 M 84xx series 8405 8410D 8411 8434DX 85xx series 8510T 8520T 9040 Enhanced Attendant Consoles 302D Internet Protocol IP Analog Digital Analog Analog Digital ISDN BRI Wireless Digital May 2002 188 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Connectable Telephone and Consoles Continued Telephone and Console Models Type 606A1 CallMaster VI ACD Console Analog 607A1 CallMaster V ACD Console Digital XM24 Expansion Module Expansion Softphones Internet Protocol IP Netmeeting H 323 IP Softphone CentreVu IP Agent Softconsole Connecting a Typical Telephone The 302C1 D Enhanced Attendant Console is used to describe a telephone connection typically used with the 84xx 4 wire telephones The 302D does not require auxiliary power unless it has a 26C1 DXS console or Vacuum Fluorescent Display The 302C1 attendant console always requires auxiliary adjunct power 48 VDC Power is connected to the console through Pins 7 and 8 of the information outlet Only three consoles can be powered by the media gateway When possible the primary console should be powered from the media gateway so it has the same power failure backup as the media gateway The maximum cabling distance for the console powered from the media gateway is 350 feet 100 meters The general steps to connect a telephone are 1 Choose a device to connect such as a 302D Attendant Con
83. 2 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Install the Battery Mounting Wiring Three types of back up batteries are used See Back Up Battery Rating on page 232 for the battery type and rating 1 Insert two 10 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws into the top designated battery holes on the wall mounting plate Lightly screw in but do not tighten Place the keyhole slots in the battery bracket on these two screws The battery cord exits from the right of the bracket Make sure the label on the battery is visible Tighten the screws securely Plug the battery cord into the power supply s right rear receptacle The rear receptacle is indicated on the right label Back Up Battery Rating Battery Rating 1148B 2 5 amp hours 1149B 5 amp hours 1147B 8 amp hours Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit A second power distribution unit can be installed to provide power to additional devices CAUTION Total power cannot exceed 275 Watts The maximum ISDN terminal mixture is twenty four 7500 series and twenty four 8500 series terminals The maximum DCP terminal mixture is twenty four 7400 series and twenty four 8400 series or sixty four 8400 series terminals The expanded power distribution unit kit contains One 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit One T Cable Two 8 32 x 1 2 inch Shoulder Screws One 8 32 x 1 inch Screw One Spacer Bracket May 2002 Installing the
84. 203 e Install the 26B1 Selector Console on page 204 Attendant Console Cabling Distances Local and Phantom Power A console s maximum distance from the media gateway is limited The maximum distance for a 302D console is as shown in Attendant Console Cabling Distances on page 202 May 2002 201 202 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Attendant Console Cabling Distances 24 AWG Wire 26 AWG Wire Enhanced Attendant Console 0 5106 mm 0 4049 mm 302D Feet Meters Feet Meters With Selector Console Phantom powered 800 244 500 152 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Without Selector Console Phantom powered 1400 427 900 274 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Auxiliary Power CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console The nonessential functions of an attendant console and its optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector console derive their power from an auxiliary power source Of the maximum of 27 attendant consoles 3 of the consoles can derive auxiliary power from the media gateway and through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk auxiliary field Provide auxiliary power for a primary attendant console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from Individual 1151A1 or 1151A2 power supply e 258A type adapters Bulk power supplies such a
85. 3E04 standby 1 A PNC 01A01 01E04 active Service System System State Clock Tones in standby standby in active active Open Bus Leads 0 May 2002 289 290 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Save Translations if Required Use the media server web interface If any administration changes are made save the translations and back them up 1 Under Data Backup Restore click Backup Now Backup Now Data Sets M Avaya Call Processing ACP Translations M Server and System Files M Security Files Backup Method C FIP User Name Password Host Name Directory C Emal User Name at Domain Name Mail Server Local PC Card Retain data sets at destination Encryption Encrypt backup using pass phrase Start Backup About This Screen 2 Select the data sets and the backup method 3 Click Start Backup to begin the back up process Testing Telephones and Other Equipment This section describes how to test the telephones and other equipment Perform these tests after the equipment has been wired to the media gateway and after the customer s data for that equipment has been administered The tests are acceptance tests and provide some assurance that the Avaya S8700 Media Server for IP Connect Configuration will perform properly after installation and administration If problems occur or more extensive tests are required refer to the maintenance book for your configura
86. 4 ft 1 22 m 6 47 5 in 120 6 cm 6 6 ft 2 m 7 Horizontal Line 7 68 in 19 5 cm 8 AC Power Strip 7 8 in 2 22 cm 9 Floor Line 5 31 in 13 5 cm May 2002 160 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair 9 i 1758421b MMR 031496 Figure notes 1 4ft 1 22m 6 7 8 in 2 22 cm 2 Horizontal Line 7 23in 58 4 cm 3 7 681n 19 5 cm 8 8ft 2 43m 4 47 51n 120 6 cm 9 AC Power Strip 5 5 31 in 13 5 cm 10 Floor Line Mount 110P type terminal blocks on a frame The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks and the associated patch cord troughs can also be mounted on a free standing floor mounted 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame See 1110A2 and 1110C1 Apparatus Mountings on page 161 May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 161 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Each 1110A2 provides the space to mount 5 terminal blocks patch cord troughs on each side of the frame A cable support structure apparatus mounting 1110C1 mounts directly on top of the 1110A2 and provides support for all cables routed to and from the frame See Apparatus Mounting Frame Ordering Information on page 16
87. 402 Figure notes 1 Services laptop 3 NIC adapter cable if necessary 2 PCMCIA Network Interface Card NIC 4 Black CAT5 Crossover cable Once connected you can administer the media server using three tools Media server web interface for server specific administration Linux shell interface for server specific administration Avaya Site Administration for Avaya MultiVantage M software features Acommand ine interface in a Telnet window SAT for Avaya MultiVantage M software features Media Server Web Interface You can access the media server web interface by either connecting directly to the services port on the media server see Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server on page 267 or connecting over the customer s network May 2002 267 268 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Connected to the services port To use the media server web interface open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser In the Location Address field type 192 11 13 6 When prompted log in to administer the S8700 media server and the Avaya MultiVantage M software features Connected to the customer network To use the media server web interface open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser In the Location Address field type the active server name or IP address When prompted log
88. 6 Not Used 42 Not Used 17 Not Used 43 Not Used 18 Not Used 44 Not Used 19 Not Used 45 Not Used 20 Not Used 46 Not Used DI Not Used 47 Not Used 22 Not Used 48 Not Used 23 Not Used 49 Not Used 24 Not Used 50 Not Used 25 Not Used Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T BRI with Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 1 TXT p TXR T 3 PXT TXT R 4 T PXR T May 2002 207 208 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations Continued 8510T BRI with Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection 4 pin 7 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC modular 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD jack GRD Circuit TN754 TN2181 TN556 TN2183 TN2198 Pack 4 wire 2 wire digital ISDN BRI Analog line 2 wire Basic digital 8 16 port Line 16 port Rate Interface port TN2224 line 2 wire digital 24 port PX PBX transmitT Tip A TX Terminal transmitRRing B Remote Access For information on connecting a modem to the Avaya S8700 Media Server refer to the Getting Started with the Avaya 8700 Media Server for IP Connect Configurations W May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 209 Installing and Wiring Telephones Install Off
89. 8 VDC Return Buses in All 3 DC Power Cabinets Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the media gateway when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the media gateway 1 Ensure the associated circuit breakers at the AC power panel are OFF 2 Have an electrician connect AC power leads to the rectifiers using the instructions provided with the rectifiers in the DC Power cabinet Each rectifier should have its own branch circuit Terminate leads on the AC INPUT terminal block of each rectifier May 2002 91 92 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect Battery Cabinet CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the media gateway when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the media gateway Connect the DC Battery cabinet to the DC Power cabinet DC Battery to DC Power cabinet Connections on page 92 shows how to make typical connections from the DC Battery cabinet to the DC Power cabinet DC Battery to DC Power cabinet Connections kd pwrdist5 RBP 052896 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC Power cabinet Connect Red DC Power
90. 8700 Media Server Web Interface Refer to the Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8700 Multi Connect for host names IP addresses and community strings gt NOTE Configure trap destinations only if the customer s network administrator wants alarm notification 1 Click Configure Trap Destinations to administer the simple network management protocol SNMP 2 Click Add to add new trap destinations and community strings Configure Trap Destinations Current administration for sending alarms as traps Community V3 MP User Security Name Model Authentication Privacy IP s 8 Status Notification Password Password address Version No destinations have been configured Add About This Screen May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 29 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Verify date and time The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface 1 Click Set Server Time Timezone to view the current time date and time zone settings If the time is within 3 minutes of the correct time do nothing 2 fitis not then set the current time to the correct minute and click Submit 3 Unplug the laptop from media server 1 Connect duplication cables Connect the crossover CATS cable and fiber optic cable between the media servers Refer to_ Getting Started with Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration for install
91. 88700 Multi Connect 41 Install the Media Gateways Install the Media Gateways Floor plans and equipment layouts for typical S8700 Multi Connect configuration installations are provided in Designing the Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration Media gateways are typically installed in the same equipment room as the Avaya S8700 Media Server rack hardware however the media gateways can be installed in another location including another state or country A media gateway may contain from 1 to 5 port networks PNs gt NOTE Before you begin the media gateway installation check the location of the AC DC power receptacles The receptacles must be on separately fused circuits not controlled by wall switches They must be located within 10 feet 3 meters of the gateway and outside the Main Distribution Frame MDF area This section covers the following procedures e Installing an Avaya MCCI Media Gateway on page 42 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack on page 77 e Installing an Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 106 May 2002 42 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway This section describes how to install Avaya MCC1 Media Gateways Typical Avaya MCCI Media Gateway on page 42 shows a typical Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway
92. 99 C stl2clan 255 MEDPRO O1E04 TN2302 stl2prowler 1 255 VAL 01C08 TN2501 VAL 1 258 255 255 258 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask A55 255 295 255 2455 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 5255 255 255 0 0 0 s2595 ne Das AUS 1209s 5D 2255 2258 AUS s2993 1259 AUS 2285 Qo Uo oe cocoa 0 co Uu Page 1 of s Net Gateway Address Rgn 172 22 172 22 172 22 222 22 22 254 1 254 1 254 Set the Enable Eth Pt field to y Set the Type field to VAL Type the circuit pack location in the Slot field UUCSS If a TN2501AP circuit pack is not at this location when you submit the screen the software prompts you to enter a VAL circuit pack location In the Node Name field enter the Node Name you entered in step 2 If you press Help a list of administered node names appears including the name you administered with the change node names ip command and you can select from the list Set the Subnet Mask field according to your network requirements Gateway Address is usually the same as the TN2501AP circuit pack s IP address usually with the fourth octet changed Be sure to set this address according to your network requirements Press Enter to save the changes May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 185 Connecting to the Customer s Network Administer the data module 1 Type add data module extension and press Enter The D
93. A screen similar to Sample of Port Network Status after Expansion Link is Set S8700 Multi Connect displays 5 Verify that the MODEs of the expansion links have changed 6 Ifany problems are indicated check the TDM cables and the inter cabinet cables ICC in the associated port network Sample of Port Network Status before Expansion Link is Set 5S8700 Multi Connect status port network TUN PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PNC Status ATM PNC PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby Conn Endpoints Mode 1 0 1 19 01A up 2 A PNC 01D01 ATO2A active 01B 1 A PNC 01C01 ATO1A active 01C 01D TDM Service Control Dedicated TONE Service System System Bus State Channel Tones CLOCK State Clock Tones A in n n 01A in standby standby B in y y 01B in active active Service Major Minor Bus Open Bus PKT State Alarms Alarms Faults Leads 1 in n n 0 0 ES May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Sample of Port Network Status after Expansion Link is Set S8700 Multi Connect f status port network i PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PN Control PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby 1 0 220 01A up up il 01B TDM Service Control Dedicated TONE Bus State Channel Tones CLOCK A in y n 01B B in n y 01A Service Major Minor Bus PKT State Alarms Alarms Faults 1 in n n 0 Command E FIBER LINK Endpoints Mode B PNC 01B02 0
94. ASS Sw Ss B cadsrib5 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 Ground plate covering TDM 2 Media Gateway A cable opening Note All cables running between or exiting media gateways use the opening provided for TDM cables Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya 5700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations for a connectivity guide May 2002 250 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya 5700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations for a general connectivity guide Use the following detailed steps to connect the Ethernet cables at the SCC1 media gateway 1 If not already removed remove the ground plate Remove the upper and lower rear covers from the media gateway s RX R ANN Ya SSSR SS SS N oes IS SQ SS SSSSSS ES es cadscat1 KLC 032602 Figure notes A 1 Media Gateway B Ground plate 2 Media Gateway A 5 Lower rear cover 3 Upper rear cover 2 Run the 25 or 50 m green CATS cable from the Ethernet switch through the media gateway using a cable pass thru tool May 2002 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect 251 Connect the Hardware cadscat2 KLC 032602 Install the clamp on ferrite on the CAT5 Ethernet cable This ferrite must be as close to the exit o
95. AVAYA Installing the Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations Issue 1 May 2002 Copyright 2002 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However informa tion is subject to change Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications sys tem by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a cor porate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications ser vices Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support in the United States and Canada call the Technical Service Center s Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 How to Get Help For additional support telephone numbers go to the Avaya Web site http www avaya com Click Support If you are Within the United States click Escalation Lists which includes escalation phone numbers within the USA Outside the United States click Escalation Lists then click Global Escalation List which includes phone numbers for the regional Centers of Excellence Providing Telecommunications Secu
96. Avaya SCCI Media Gateway stack or the Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical 110A Type Terminal Blocks SCC on page 123 shows a typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway installation using 110A type terminal blocks and Typical 110P Type Terminal Blocks MCC on page 124 shows a typical Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway installation using 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks Typical 110A Type Terminal Blocks SCC HH IU Y RS j 7 i SSS E SSS S bo d y SN L 1758534 CJL 042996 Figure notes 1 Avaya SCCI Media Gateways 4 Station Cables apiece 5 Station Distribution Field 2 Z7113A Cable Slack Manager 6 Port Distribution Field 3 25 Pair Cable to Media Gateway 7 Trunk Auxiliary Field May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Main Distribution Frame 124 mccmd f KLC 060596 SS N NSI NN i us i Typical 110P Type Terminal Blocks MCC Figure notes Station Distribution Field 5 6 7 Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Z113A Cable Slack Manager 1 Port Distribution Field Trunk Auxiliary Field 2 3 4 25 Pair Cable to Media Gateway Station Cables May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 125 Main Distribution Frame La
97. DF 10 Auxiliary Cabinet Yellow Field 3 Port Distribution Field Purple Field 11 White Field 4 Station Distribution Field White Field 12 Blue Field 5 Trunk Auxiliary Field 13 Cross Connect Jumpers 6 Purple Field 14 103A or Modular Wall Jack 7 Yellow Field 15 4 Pair Line Cord 8 Green Field 16 To Line Circuit Pack May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 121 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Example MDF Connections Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 Port MET Line ZXZIIIXIZITIZZINSUENENEREEBEEUAEE Port Tie Trunk ZZNENIZSZEZZSNIZENSUENBEEBEEEEEUAENE wi ESM Signaling PIE ELE PY EE ee ne Port Analog ZEINIENIZENIUBNZZUNIENZENIEUAEBN Port CO ZHENZENZEHEIZEUEZENBIENBZENIEUNEE Port Data Line ETZEZSIEZINEZINEZINSZIEZCIEZXIE Port DID ZEINIENZENIZUBZEZUNIENZENIEUAEN Port Digital ETZEZIEZINEZINEZINSCINZINEZXZIE Port Hybrid ISIICIISIISCIICSIICOIICIISCIN Port BRI IXEICIIXIISIEXCIICIISEIISEIN Port Analog EXGEXEEENHTXIZIEZXZIEENEIZIXEINE Port Digital XGEZEBENETIZIZCIZIENENETIZXEINE Port Analog HESUEGEDUERESGEECXXECGEECEXUCEIXEINE Port Digital HEGUEGGUEREGUEECXIEEGHECGEEZUEErNE EM NON E EN ee oe ee oe oo widfccf2 EWS 102798 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
98. EL to quit press NEXT PAGE to continue ul Test Media Server Interchange A CAUTION An interchange causes a brief service interruption Use the media server web interface 1 Click on Interchange Servers to view the Interchange Servers screen 2 Do not check Force interchange regardless of server status to allow file synchronizations to complete before the interchange proceeds 3 Click on Interchange to interchange the active and standby servers 4 Click on Interchange again to interchange the active and standby servers back to the original status Test the IPSI Circuit Pack Use Avaya Site Administration 1 Type test ipserver interface UUC and press Enter to test all clock and packet interface components within the IPSI circuit pack 2 Verify the screen displays Test Results screen similar to Sample IPSI 01A Test Results Screen Page 1 8700 Multi Connect May 2002 285 286 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Sample IPSI 01A Test Results Screen Page 1 S8700 Multi Connect f test ipserver interface la Page EN EN TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01A TONE BD 46 PASS 01A TONE BD 52 PASS 01A0201 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0201 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0202 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0202 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0203 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0203 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0204 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0204 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0205 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0205
99. F2 O W 4 O V 44 To Tone Clock Carrier A BCLKRTN R O 13 ALRMS5B V G 45 BCLKLST O R 14 ALRMSA G V 46 BPWRRTN R BR 17 ALRM4B BK BL 21 BPWRLST BR R 18 ALRM4A BL BK 22 REF2RTN W BR 7 ALRM3B R BR 17 REF2LST BR W 8 ALRM3A BR R 18 SCLKRTN R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 SCLKLST BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 SPWRRTN R G 15 ALRMIB Y BL 31 SPWRLST G R 16 ALRMIA BL Y 32 REFIRTN W G 5 ALRMOB W BR 7 REFILST G W 6 ALRMOA BR W 8 CCAOIR R S 19 V BL 41 EXTSYNOT CCAOIT S R 20 BL V 42 EXTSYNOR CCBOIR BK BL 21 Y G 35 EXTSYNIT CCBOIT BL BK 22 G Y 36 EXTSYNIR May 2002 113 114 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Install the Stratum 3 clock Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connec Connec ting ting Block Block Lead Lead Termin Lead Lead Termin Designation Color al Designation Color al RREFI W BL 1 V O 43 TREFI BL W 2 O V 44 To Y Cable Clock End Secondary W O 3 V O 43 Lead Lead Co O W 4 O V 44 Designatio Color nne n ctin g Blo ck Ter mi nal To Tone Clock Carrier B ALRMS5B ALRMSB V G 45 ALRM5A ALRMS5A G V 46 BPWRRTN R BR 17 ALRM4B 21 ALRM4B 21 BK BL BK B L BPWRLST BR R 18 ALRM4A 229 ALRMAA 2 BL BK BL B K REF2RTN 7 ALRM3B R BR 17 ALRM3B R BR 17 W BR REF2LST 8 ALRM3A BR R 18 ALRM3A BR R 18 BR W SCLKRTN R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 SCLKLST BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 SPWRRTN R G 15 ALRMIB Y BL 31 ALRMIB Y BL 31 SPWRLST
100. G R 16 ALRMIA BL Y 32 ALRMIA BL Y 32 REFIRTN W G 5 ALRMOB W BR 7 ALRMOB W BR 7 REFILST G W 6 ALRMOA BR W 8 ALRMOA BR W 8 May 2002 Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 115 Install the Stratum 3 clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connec Connec ting ting Block Block Lead Lead Termin Lead Termin Designation Color al Designation Color al CCAOIR R S 19 V BL 41 EXTSYNOT CCAOIT S R 20 BL V 42 EXTSYNOR CCBOIR 21 Y G 35 BK B EXTSYNIT L CCBOIT p G Y 36 BL B EXTSYNIR K CCAO2R BK O 23 V BL 41 EXTSYNO T CCAO2T O BK 24 BL V 42 EXTSYNO R CCB0O2R BK G 25 Y G 35 EXTSYNI T CCBO2T G BK 26 G Y 36 EXTSYNI R May 2002 116 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Cabling Port Networks Cabling Port Networks This section provides both information about installing the telecommunications cabling and procedures for doing the installation Information about Installing the Cabling e Provisioning Plan on page 118 e Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware on page 119 e MDF Cross Connect Fields on page 122 e Main Distribution Frame on page 123 Main Distribution Frame Labels on page 125 e Off Premises Circuit Protection on page 126 e Cable Installation on page 128 e Sneak Fuse Panels on page 127 e Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 133 Installation Space
101. G TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension type in 3 extension numbers in the 3 fields provided Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 Test Type Test Features Test type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 5 5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB Quiet until disconnect disconnect is forced after 1 minute 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB 1 second of silence Cycle is repeated until disconnect which is forced after 24 hours 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 second of silence 9 seconds of 404 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 second of silence 9 seconds of 2804 Hz tone at 16 dB 30 seconds of silence 0 5 seconds of test progress tone 2225 Hz About 5 seconds of silence Forced disconnect May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 295 Testing the Complete Configuration Test the C LAN Connectivity 1 Totestthe external IP connections ping the C LAN circuit pack and ping a known computer connected to your network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads PASS If it reads ABORT verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling 2 To ping the C LAN server type ping ip address nun nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack 3 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS
102. Install the 26B1 Selector Console 1 Connect the supplied 3 foot 0 9 m D8AC cable to the modular jack on the bottom of the 26B1 Selector Console 2 Route the cable to the attendant console and connect to the DXS BLF jack 3 Attach labels according to the Attendant Console form 4 Administer the console using Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power Alarms can be generated on adjunct equipment sent to the media server and recorded and reported as external alarms A typical major alarm input is from an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS The media server provides a relay contact that can operate a customer provided alarm such as a light or bell The circuitry and power source are customer provided The alarm device must not exceed a rating of more than 100 volts at 0 75 amp 1 Connect 1 major and 1 minor alarm input pair to the trunk auxiliary field from the AUX connector See Alarm Inputs at AUX Connector on page 204 2 Connectan external alarm output through pins 48 and 23 of the AUX connector See Alarm Output at AUX Connector on page 204 3 Note which device connects to which alarm and give this information to your Avaya representative for troubleshooting purposes 4 Connect emergency transfer power and auxiliary power as shown in Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power on page 205 Auxiliary power includes power to an attendant console or a
103. Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware Connecting directly to the IPSI O O O cKO mea La L rj cadlipsi KLC 031502 Lil L Figure notes 1 Services laptop 3 NIC adapter cable if necessary 2 PCMCIA Network Interface Card NIC 4 Green CATS5 cable to IPSI 1 Connect the services laptop computer to the top port on the IPSI circuit pack faceplate Click Start Run to open the Run dialog box services laptop Type command and press Enter to open a MSDOS Command Line window A O N Type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear the ARP cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The command line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the ARP cache 5 Type telnet 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to open the Telnet window and connect to the IPSI Prompt IPSI gt NOTE While connected to the IPSI type help or to obtain online help Most commands have two or three letter abbreviations 6 Type ipsilogin and press Enter abbreviated command il 7 Loginas craft May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 259 Connect the Hardware Prompt IPADMIN 8 Type set control interface lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt
104. Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Troubleshooting an Installation Configuring the Media Server Hardware Problem Solution Can t log into UPS subagent Can t log into Ethernet switch Can t log into media server Can t access the web interface Can t access MultiVantage software LED display on IPSI is flashing Make sure the SNMP Subagent is installed in the UPS Make sure you are connected to the correct Ethernet port Make sure you have the correct login ID and password Refer to the user s guide that comes with the SNMP Subagent Make sure the the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information Make sure you are connected to the correct Ethernet port On Cajun Ethernet switch it s the port marked Console Make sure you have the correct login ID and password Refer to the user s guide that comes with the Ethernet switch Make sure the the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information Make sure you are connected to the correct Ethernet port Default is port 2 Eth1 on the back of the server Make sure you are using a crossover cable between the laptop and server Make sure the MAC cache is cleared In an MS DOS window type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter Make sure you have connectivity In an MS DOS window type ping 192 11 13 6 and type Enter Make sure t
105. Local and Phantom Power 201 Auxiliary Power 202 Hard Wire Bridging 203 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 11 Contents Dual Wiring of Two Wire and Four Wire Endpoints 203 Install the Attendant Console 203 Install the 26B1 Selector Console 204 Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power 204 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires 205 Remote Access 208 Install Off Premises Station Wiring 209 Off Premises or Out of Building Stations 209 Off Premises Connections 209 Off Premises Protection Requirements 211 Telephone Restrictions for Exposed Environments 212 Digital Out of Building Telephone Protection 212 Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones 214 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples 215 Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel 217 Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field 222 Install Telephones Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field 223 Install External Ringing 224 Install the Queue Warning Indicator 225 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 226 1145B22 Power Supply 226 Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply er Mounting the 1145B2 1146B2 Power Supply 228 Install the Wall Mounting Plates 231 Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit 231 Install the Battery Mounting Wiring 232 Install the
106. MDF area 1 2 Position the clock cabinet in the designated location If earthquake protection is required skip to Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCCI Media Gateway on page 80 or Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 46 If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinet from moving Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet The clock cabinet requires a 120 VAC 15 amp receptacle The green wire ground provided by the receptacle is sufficient The clock cabinet does not require a ground connection back to the single point ground May 2002 108 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Install the Stratum 3 clock Check and Connect Commercial AC Power Before powering up the 8700 Multi Connect configuration check the AC power using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent 1 2 Set the DVM to the 250 volt range Carefully measure the voltage between the hot and neutral side of the receptacle The neutral wire is white the hot wire 1s black Verify the meter reads 106 to 128 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem Measure the voltage between the neutral and ground side of the receptacle The ground wire is green Verify the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem Set all cabinet power modules OFF Plug the AC power cable into the r
107. NMENT RECORD Page Extension Bldg Voice Voice Number Fir Terminal Terminal Slot Port Jack Old Adjunct User Name Use To be completed by installation technician r764787 PDH 071596 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Example 3 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet 9 EDEL ILI DEGLI ILLS GILLIES VAAASAHIIJZSA a crdf5pr CJL 103096 Figure notes 1 Equipment Room 8 D Inside Wire Cut Down to 2 Satellite Location opnecune Block 3 Work Location M COPA BUTS 4 White Row on 110 Terminal Block 10 SToiormanom Outlet 5 Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block Th voice ierminal 6 Blue Row on 110 Terminal Block 1g Ne ed panna MA 7 Central Location for Terminals 1 through 6 May 2002 151 152 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Example 4 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet ZII LL LLL LL LLL LLL crdf4pr CJL 102996 Figure notes 1 Equipment Room 6 258A Adapter 2 To Central Location for Terminals 1 7 D Inside Wire Cut Down to through 6 Connecting Block 3 Blue Row on 110 Terminal Block 8 Information Outlet 4 Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block 9 Voice Terminal 5 To Port Connector on Media Gateway Media Gatewa
108. Nut welded to frame raised variable floor height threaded rod 3 8 16 lt Concrete floor anchor concrete subfloor cab_base CJL 052096 Connect AC Power and Ground CAUTION The equipment room AC power and ground wiring must be performed by a qualified electrician Refer to Designing the Avaya S8700 Media Gateway Multi Connect Configuration for site requirement information CAUTION The power circuit must be dedicated to the S8700 Multi Connect configuration and must not be shared with other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch The AC receptacle should not be located under the MDF CAUTION S8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country containing the equipment For more information refer to Approved Grounds Wi May 2002 50 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway For information about connecting AC power and ground see Power Requirements on page 50 Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 on page 50 Grounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE on page 51 Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground on page 67 Task List Connect AC power and ground Perform th
109. Out May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 165 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout Connector Pin Numbers Pair Fuse Number 26 1 1 27 2 2 28 3 3 29 4 4 30 5 5 31 6 6 32 7 7 33 8 8 34 9 9 35 10 10 36 11 11 37 12 12 38 13 13 39 14 14 40 15 15 41 16 16 42 17 17 43 18 18 44 19 19 45 20 20 46 21 21 47 22 22 48 23 23 49 34 24 50 25 25 May 2002 166 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 167 CBC connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated telecommunications cable The mutual coupling between the bonding conductor and the pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment 1 Cuta 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire long enough to reach from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration s single point ground block or DC power media gateway Ground Discharge Bar to the MDF CBC block 2 Connectone end of the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the single point ground block or Ground Discharge Bar Route the wire next to the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary purple field Tie wrap the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the 25 pair cables Connect the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the MDF CBC ground block o a Aa WwW Repeat the above steps for each CBC ground wire installed May 2002 In
110. RPO External Alarm Cable May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 71 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 2 To Carriers Ato E Battery Cabinet O pp m m mmn Terminal TB1 RPO Cable Bar 716 Auxiliary Contacts in EPO Switch 0026_3 RBP 080196 Connect External Alarm Cable 1 Plug the external alarm cable into the connector shown in External Alarm Cable Connection on page 71 2 Route the opposite end of the cable to the MDE The alarm cable is connected to the MDF later External Alarm Cable Connection Carrier circuit breakers Connect RPO cable here J21 Connect external NM NV alarm cable here J18 lt RC Pin 6 RPO Pin 2 RPO External psdf002 CJL 081596 alarm cable May 2002 72 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Check Commercial Power and Connect AC Power Before powering up the 8700 Multi Connect configuration check the AC power using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent 1 Set the DVM to the 250 volt range 2 Carefully measure the voltage between the hot and neutral side of the receptacle The neutral wire is white the hot wire is black 3 Verify the meter reads 106 to 128 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 4 Measure the voltage between t
111. Requirements on page 134 for the sneak fuse panels the 110 type hardware and the Cable Slack Manager e Station Wiring Design on page 135 e Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room on page 140 e Layout on page 148 e Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration on page 150 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 117 Installing the Telecommunications Cabling Installing the Telecommunications Cabling b amp b oO N oa 10 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable on page 152 Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 153 Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 153 Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity on page 154 Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF on page 156 Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF on page 157 Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall on page 158 or Mount 110P type terminal blocks on a frame on page 160 Install Cable Slack Managers on page 162 Install Sneak Fuse Panels on page 164 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 166 May 2002 118 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Provisioning Plan Provisioning Plan A provisioning plan should be completed prior to an installation The plan determines an appropriate availab
112. S8700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Installing and Wiring Telephones The wiring procedures are the same for most Avaya telephones and other equipment This task list provides wiring examples of similar installation procedures These are examples only actual wiring procedures may vary at each site After installing the hardware the data for the telephone features must be administered These procedures are provided in the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software gt NOTE Refer to the Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage Solutions to install the necessary peripheral equipment Wiring Telephones Task List Wiring Examples and Wiring Procedures Connect Telephones on page 187 Analog Tie Trunk Example on page 192 Digital Tie Trunk Example on page 192 DS1 Tie Trunk Example on page 193 Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only on page 196 Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity on page 199 Adjunct Power Connection Locations on page 200 Attendant Console Example on page 201 Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power on page 204 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires on page 205 Remote Access on page 208 Off Premises or Out of Building Stations on page 209 Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telepho
113. S8700 Multi Connect 233 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Refer to Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 230 while installing the power distribution unit 1 Set the spacer bracket onto the mounting plate and secure with the 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws The spacer bracket is not shown in the figure but is installed behind the top power distribution unit 2 Slide the keyhole slots in the power distribution unit over the shoulder screws 3 Insert the 48 32 x 1 inch screw through the distribution unit through the spacer bracket and into the plate The mounting hole is located just above the wire clip Tighten the screw securely 4 Setthe battery back up switch to the 1 32 down position Power down the 1145B2 unit as described on the label on the side of the unit 6 Remove the output power cable between the 1145B2 and the 1146B2 units The cable will not be reused 7 Connect the P1 connector end of the T cable to the bottom power distribution unit Connect the P2 connector to the top distribution unit Connect the P3 connector to the 1145B2 8 Power up the 1145B2 as described on the label on the side of the unit Power Up and Test the Power Supply The following table describes the meaning of the power supply LEDs when lit LED Color Meaning Green Power Supply is providing power Yellow Battery is charging Red Power Supply is on battery reserve 1 Connect the AC power cord to the power supply and
114. TN IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address Tiki 112 222 622 19 cdr 1 192 168 22 63 default Oc 20 uw 200 iolan L72 22 522 68 lulu cl1 12 322 52 2 fT lulu c12 72 22 22 4 77 riki 172 22 222 20 rsat4 D7Z 3L 05 249 rsat5 172 23 223 40 stl0clan 1 192 168 22 21 stl2clan 172 22 22 907 stl2prowler 1 Lhe 22 422 415 VAL 1 P2622 222 3120 12 of 12 administered node names are displayed Use list node names command to see all the administered node names change node names ip xxx to change a node name xxx or add a node name E 2 Type a unique name in the Name field This name is recognized only within the MultiVantage software and does not need to match the node name on your network 3 Enterthe IP Address Get this information from the network administrator or refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8700 IP Connect or Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8 amp 700 Multi Connect 4 Press Enter to save the changes May 2002 184 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Administer the IP interfaces 1 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter The IP Interfaces screen appears Use this screen to administer an IP interface which associates the circuit pack with an IP address JDoOBDDDDODBODBOD u u change ip interfaces IP INTERFACES Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name C LAN 01C16 TN7
115. Terminal Equip ment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY United States FCC Part 68 Supplier s Declaration of Conformity SDoC Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with the FCC s Rules and Regu lations 47 CFR Part 68 and the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA adopted technical criteria Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset equipped terminal equip ment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68 316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U S can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are avail able on the following Web site http support avaya com elmodocs2 DoC SDoC index jhtml All MultiVantage M system products are compliant with FCC Part 68 but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at http www part68 org
116. Test Integrated Announcement 293 Record Announcement 293 Playback Announcement 293 Delete Announcement 293 Test Music on Hold 293 Test Emergency Transfer S8700 Multi Connect only 293 Test Remote Access Interface 294 Test Terminating Trunk Transmission 294 Test the C LAN Connectivity 295 Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only 295 Resolve Alarms 296 May 2002 14 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Troubleshooting an Installation Installing the Media Server Hardware Configuring the Media Server Hardware Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files Index May 2002 297 297 298 299 301 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 15 Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration These procedures are for installing a new Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration As part of the procedures for configuring the various pieces of hardware you use three administration interfaces media server web interface Avaya Site Administration interface and a command line interface The following process is included in this installation procedure e Pre installation Setup on page 16 e Mount the Hardware in the Rack on page 19 e Configure the Hardware in the Rack on page 20 e Customize the Active Media Server on page 36 Install the Media Gateways on page 41 e Cabling Port Networks on page 116
117. Tools Help ebak gt o fat Qsearch Favorites History EM E zi ome i iter 7 8 Loginas craft 9 When asked Do you want to suppress alarms select yes gt NOTE The menu choices are in the left panel 10 Inthe menu under Server select Set Server Time Timezone 11 Setthe correct time on Server 2 12 Scroll down the menu to Installation and Upgrades Miscellaneous Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports Upload Files to Server via browser Download Files to Server from web Server Configuration and Upgrades View Software Version Configure Server Install New Software Release Make Server Upgrade Permanent View Partiton Status Reset to Defaults gt NOTE For help with any of the web pages click About This Page on the web page or Help at the top of the main menu 13 Click Configure Server to open the first page of the Configure Server wizard 14 Select Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration and click Continue May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 31 Configure the Hardware in the Rack 15 Click through the Review Notices to get to the Set Server Identities page gt NOTE Most of the fields are populated with default settings Do not change the defaults unless the customer requests it refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8700 Multi Connect 16 Fill in the fields on the Set Server Identities and
118. a 25 pair cable between the male RJ21 25 pair connector on the Emergency Transfer Panel and the yellow field of the Main Distribution Frame MDF Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector on page 219 shows the pinouts May 2002 217 218 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Make cross connections for each emergency trunk emergency station pair The 808A is connected to the Main Distribution Frame MDF by means of a B25A cable Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer on page 221 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used only for emergency transfer Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension on page 222 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used for emergency transfer as well as a normal extension On the trunk identification label at the bottom of the panel record the trunk line extension and location for each circuit To each telephone designated as an emergency terminal attach a label identifying it as such The labels are provided with the unit Check for normal operation as follows Place the test switch switch 12 in NORMAL OPERATION Ensure the power supply is providing 48 VDC at 80 mA maximum The power LED should be ON Check wiring connections e Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met r
119. a gateway to be installed Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting 1 Position the media gateway in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete 2 Inserta pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the media gateways and mark the raised floor panels directly beneath each hole 3 Rollthe media gateway out of the way and drill 4 holes 5 8 in 1 6 cm in diameter through the raised floor panels marked in Step 2 CAUTION Take care while drilling the holes through the raised floor that the drill bit does not penetrate any cables below the floor that could cause damage to the cable or injury to the installer 4 Inserta long punch through the holes drilled in Step 3 and mark the concrete floor beneath the raised floor panels 5 Remove the raised floor panels in which the holes were drilled 6 Using 1 2 in 1 3 cm anchor bits drill a hole at each of the locations marked in Step 4 Stop drilling when the mark on the side of the bit reaches the floor level May 2002 48 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 9 10 Insert a concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into the hole until the mark on the bit reaches floor level again Snap the top of the anchor bit off Repeat for the remaining holes A 3 8 16 threaded rod part number 845557073 is used to secure the media gateway to each concrete f
120. able See Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables on page 138 25 pair station cable Use between the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters Use an A25D cable male to male between the equipment room and satellite closet Use a B25A cable between the equipment room and site closet or adapter Multiple 25 pair station cable Use between the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters This cable consists of individually sheathed 25 pair cables with a factory installed 25 pair connector on each end Use a male to female cable to connect between the equipment room and site location or adapter Use a male to male cable to connect between the equipment room and satellite location Staggered finger cables are recommended for all multiple 25 pair station cables and are available in both double ended and single ended types May 2002 136 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Wiring Design Single modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable between adapters and information outlets that require push on connections It can also be used when 4 pair station cables are field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and modularly connected to information outlets The station cables are available in the following lengths e 10 ft 3 05 m e 25 ft 7 62 m e 50 ft 15 24 m e 75 ft 22 86 m 100 ft 30 5 m 150 ft 45 72 m e 200 ft 61
121. able from protruding above the top of the base of the cable slack manager Determine the length of the cable required to reach from the cable slack manager to the assigned connecting terminal block Use D rings on the wall to support the cable The cable must be supported Coil the cable around the columns in the cable slack manager to store cable slack The first run should always go across the full length of the 5 columns in the cable slack manager e Connect the cable to the assigned connecting terminal block Avoid placing copper cables where they may bend or strain fiber optic cables Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installation A connector on the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier is labeled AUX A 25 pair cable connects the AUX connector to a 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field The AUX connector outputs include the following 7 DC power 48 VDC sources for emergency transfer units 3DC power 48 VDC sources for remotely powering a total of 3 attendant consoles or executive voice terminal adjuncts May 2002 130 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Cable Installation Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway The 1 pair of Central Office CO trunks are installed by the network provider in the green field Up to 24 pairs may be terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block Tie trunks also appear in the green field with up to eight 3 p
122. ackup Now Data Sets Avaya Call Processing ACP Translations W Server and System Files FM Security Files Backup Method C FTP User Name Password Host Name Directory C Emal User Name at Domain Name Mail Server Loca PC Card Retain data sets at destination Encryption Encrypt backup using pass phrase Start Backup About This Screen Select Local PC card as the backup method Click Backup now to back up all data to the PCMCIA flashcard Release busied out media server The following administration is done on a computer used to access the busied media server using the S8700 Media Server Web Interface 1 Under Server click Release Server to release the standby media server from busy out mode Under Server click View Summary Status to verify that the media server is no longer in busy out mode and verify the health of both media servers Register the S8700 Multi Connect configuration 1 Follow existing process and procedures to register the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations May 2002 266 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server To administer the Avaya 88700 Media Server you must be able to access it Personal computers and services laptop computers equipped with a network PCMCIA card and Avaya Site Administration ASA and a Web browser are the primary support access for S8700 Multi C
123. ading firmware 261 verify circuit pack version 40 ITW Linx enhanced protector 212 ITW Linx enhanced protector installing 213 J J58890CE 2 power distribution unit 58 J58890CG DC power distribution unit 87 J58890H port cabinet 80 J58890L control cabinet 80 J58890N expansion control cabinet 80 J58890R DC power cabinet 83 87 94 jumper fields port cabinet 98 jumper wires connecting trunk pairs 154 jumpers installing and administering 150 L labels on power supply warning 79 labels control carrier cable 152 labels equipment room cabling 128 labels MDF 125 LAN connecting to 168 large battery holdover 57 lead designations port circuit packs and telephones 191 198 207 LEDs alarms 272 attendant consoles 277 Cajun P333T Ethernet switch 275 circuit packs 280 DS1 converter circuit packs 281 IPSI 277 power distribution unit 236 8700 Media Server 272 Stratum 3 clock 295 T1 E1 status 283 testing on S8700 Media Server 273 UPS 276 License File 18 license file copy to media server 25 install 25 light emitting diodes See LEDs locating the MDF 123 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Index M main circuit breaker 65 Main Distribution Frame See MDF MCC earthquake protection 46 47 MDF alarm connections 205 emergency transfer connections 217 emergency transfer unit 214 off premises connections 209 MDF cabling 128 MDF connections multicarrier cabinet
124. air trunks terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block WP 90929 List 1 and 3 concentrator cables can be used to connect the media gateway to the 110 type terminal blocks in the purple field The 1 pair patch cords jumper wires are then run from the purple terminal block rows to the green terminal block rows in order to establish the correct 3 pair modularity Equipment Room Cabling Labels 9 o Al 9 o Figure notes 1 Purple Label Port Cable 3 Yellow Label Auxiliary 2 Blue Yellow Label Building 4 Blue Yellow Label Site or and Floor Satellite Equipment Room Labels Label Name Range Port Cable 1A1 1A20 1B1 1B20 1C1 1C20 1D1 1D20 1E1 1E20 Building Field Identified Floor Field Identified Auxiliary Cable Field Identified Site or Satellite A F and or Field Identified May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 131 Cable Installation Cable Connector Building Label Ordering Information Description Quantity Comcode 201A Labels 34 Sheets 103969994 Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector Ae M 3 O Ibdf25p LJK 101596 Cable Routing to Top Terminal Blocks r758424b MMR 052996 Figure notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered Media Gateways Only 3 Cable Slack Manager Number 1 4 Trunk Auxiliary Field Cable Slack Manager Number 2 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 Media Gateway s To Building Cables 10 10 AWG
125. all off premises out of building trunks lines and terminal installations Both over voltage protection lightning power induction and so forth and sneak current protection are required Sneak current protectors must be either UL listed CSA certified or must comply with local safety standards Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600 V or as required by local regulations The following devices protect the 58700 Multi Connect configuration from over voltages Analog trunks use the 507B sneak protector or equivalent Over voltage protection is normally provided by the local telephone company Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over voltage and sneak current protection or equivalent Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E W Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S DCP and ISDN BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S 75 with heat coil protector or equivalent DS1 E1 T1 circuits require isolation from exposed facilities This isolation may be provided by a CSU T1 LIU E1 or other equipment that provides equivalent protection May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 127 Sneak Fuse Panels Sneak Fuse Panels Sneak current protection is required between the incoming RJ21X or RJ2GX network interface and the S8700 Multi Connect configuration for both trunk and off premise circuit pack
126. alled a separate sneak current protector is required May 2002 212 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones The multi pair protector units and the off premises cabling must be locally engineered Connected multi pair protector units female 25 pair connector are recommended Analog Line Circuit Protectors on page 212 shows the recommended protectors The protectors can be ordered from the Premises Distribution Systems Equipment and Supplies Catalog Analog Line Circuit Protectors Primary Sneak Current Primary with heat coil Protectors 3B1A carbon 4B1C carbon 220029 Fuse 3B1E W 4B1E W SCP 1 wide gap gas tube wide gap gas tube 3C1S 4CI1S solid state solid state 1 The3 type protectors should be used only if they are already part of the existing protection system A sneak current protector is always required when a 3 type primary protector is used Telephone Restrictions for Exposed Environments Analog telephones connected to TN746 Analog Line circuit packs cannot be installed in an exposed environment Digital Out of Building Telephone Protection Digital out of building telephones require protection at both building entrances The 4C3S 75 Enhanced Protector and the ITW Linx Enhanced Protector can be used to protect digital telephones and digital line circuit packs These units provide primary and sneak current protection The 4C3S 75 is equipped with a heat coil
127. another one or any other Avaya configuration 1 2 3 Set the option switches on the port circuit pack such as TN760 Refer to the Job Aid entitled Option Switch Settings for detailed information Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the tie trunk circuit pack to the appropriate leads on the external tie trunk Analog Tie Trunk Wiring on page 192 shows a media gateway tie trunk connected to another media gateway tie trunk Names of the tie trunk leads must be determined from the manufacturer or supplier of the external trunk circuit Administer on the Trunk Group screen on Avaya Site Administration Refer to the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more details Analog Tie Trunk Wiring 9 9 Figure notes T1 264 4 29 T2 R1 14 4 4 0 4 R2 T11 274 4 30 T12 R11 24 5 R12 E 1 284 4 31 E2 M 1 34 gt gt 6 M2 tie wire RBP 071796 External Trunk or Adapter 2 Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Position 1C05 Digital Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect digital tie trunk wiring from one media gateway to another one or any other Avaya configuration Digital Tie Trunk Wiring on page 193 shows the connections 1 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the digital trunk circuit pack to appropriate pins on the manufacturer s or supplier s external digital trunk 2 Set option switches on the port cir
128. ansfer testing 293 enable Ethernet switch ports 262 EPN cabinets cabinet location 80 equipment room cabling labels 128 equipment room cable routing 129 equipment room station circuit distribution from 140 Ethernet switch disabling unused ports 262 Ethernet switches configure 35 connect cables to UPS 32 expanded power distribution unit 232 expansion interface circuit packs testing 286 expansion interface exchange testing 288 expansion links service state 283 external alarm cable connecting 71 external alarm indicators connecting 204 external alarm wiring 190 205 external ringing installing 224 external ringing testing 292 F faceplates TN2312AP circuit pack 278 fiber optic cable critical reliability CSS system 75 direct connect systems 72 high reliability CSS system 74 installing 73 standard reliability CSS system 73 fiber optic cable connecting 104 firmware upgrade cajun Ethernet switch 262 IPSI circuit pack 261 floor plans 148 frame ground 84 front ground plate 101 G ground coupled bonding conductor 52 94 coupled bonding connector 133 DC power distribution unit 85 frame ground 84 May 2002 304 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Index ground plate 100 101 ground wiring DC 59 ground cabinets 62 grounding planning 83 grounding DC cabinet 83 grounds connecting AC 49 94 H hardware configure 20 connecting 242 hardware MDF 119 h
129. ask In the Gateway Address field use the address you are given or leave blank Set the Net Region field to 1 unless you are given a different number Set the Enable Eth Pt fieldtoy 6 Press Enter to save the information and effect the new settings Refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more information on these administration steps and for the steps to administer IP Softphones and H 323 trunks May 2002 178 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Test the External Connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the C LAN or IP Media Processor server and ping a known computer connected to the network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads pass If it reads abort verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling 1 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor pino ip address 192 168 10 21 E PING RESULTS End pt IP Port Port Type Result Time ms Error Code 192 1068 10 21 01A13 MEDPRO PASS 10 1124 2 wy 2 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the customer s gateway and UUCSS
130. at Coils or Equivalent 11 White Field with Sneak Current Protection 12 Purple Field 5 356A Adapter 6 B25A Cable Male to Female Out Of Building Analog Telephones 13 Cross Connect Jumpers 14 Tipand Ring Wires 15 To Analog Line Circuit Pack May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 211 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections to 24 Out of Building Telephones 9 crdf24o CJL 101396 Figure notes 1 Locally Engineered Cables and 8 Out Of Building Analog Telephones FQuipient 9 Partof Main Distribution Frame 2 25 Pair Connector MDF 3 Multi Pair Protector Units Primary 10 Station Side Protectors with Heat Coils or Equivalent with Sneak Current Protection 12 White Field 11 Media Gateway Side B25A Cable Male to Female 13 Purple Field Concentrator Cable WP90929 List 1 14 Cross Connect Jumpers 356A Adapter 15 Tip and Ring Wires N OO A Out of Building Wiring Off Premises Protection Requirements Both building entrances require carbon block or equivalent protection and sneak current protection Protection can be provided by e a4 type protector which is equipped with a heat coil a3 type protector plus a separate sneak current protector The 4 type protector is the preferred device For installations not using primary protection 4 type protectors should always be used When the 3 type protector is already inst
131. ata Module screen appears Use this screen to administer the data module that is associated with the TN2501AP ethernet port c data module 30006 Page 1 of al N DATA MODULE Data Extension 30006 Name VAL 2 Data Module Type ethernet Port 150333 Link 5 Network uses 1 s for Broadcast Addresses y 2 Set the Type field to ethernet 3 Setthe Port field to correspond to the circuit pack location The port number final two digits is always 33 for the TN2501AP circuit pack 4 Setthe Link field to an unassigned or next available link number 5 Set the Network uses 1 s for Broadcast Address field according to the your network requirements 6 Type a unique name in the Name field 7 Press Enter to save your changes Administer IP routing if used 1 Type add ip route and press Enter 2 Administer IP routes to the TN2501AP circuit pack 3 Press Enter to effect the changes Test the IP connections 1 Click Start Run to open the Run dialog box 2 Type command and press Enter to open an MS DOS window 3 Type ping lt ipaddress gt where lt ipaddress gt is a known computer on the network and press Enter to verify connectivity 4 Using ASA type status link to test the new IP connections that you have administered Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator For information on the Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator refer to the documentation that comes with the R300 equipment May 2002 186 Installing the
132. ation information for a connectivity guide Configure Media Server 2 The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to server 2 using the S8700 Media Server Web Interface gt NOTE Make sure you have the complete list of IP addresses and host names before starting this process gt NOTE Make sure your networking and Web browser settings are correct Refer to Pre Installation Information S8700 Multi Connect pi 1 Plug server 2 into UPS 2 to power it up Refer to Getting Started with Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration W Connect the laptop to the dedicated services port on server 2 usually port 2 Eth1 Click Start Run to open the Run dialog box Type command and press Enter to open MSDOS Command Line window a A WO N Type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear ARP cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The command line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the ARP cache Launch the Web browser 7 Type 192 11 13 6 in the Location Netscape or Address Internet Explorer field to bring up the Web interface May 2002 30 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites
133. attery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet 67 Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground 67 Connect Remote Power Off Cable 69 Connect External Alarm Cable 71 Check Commercial Power and Connect AC Power 72 Connect Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Z2 Connect Fiber Optic Cables 73 Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 73 Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 74 Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node T5 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ji Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways 79 Check Circuit Packs 79 Position the Media Gateway Stacks 80 Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway 80 Ground DC power media gateways 83 Task List Connect Ground to DC power cabinet 83 Connect Ground for DC power cabinet 83 Connect DC Battery Frame Ground 84 Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground 85 Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground 86 Connect DC Power 87 Task List Connect the DC power 87 Making DC Power Connections 88 DC Power Connections with DC Distribution Unit 88 Stacking DC Power Cabinets 88 Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet 91 Connect Battery Cabinet 92 Connect Optional Battery Leads 93 Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways 94 Task List Connect the AC Grounds 94 Connect AC Power Ground 94 Set the Ringer Frequency 96 Connect the Power Cord into the Power Receptacle 96 Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables 96 Veri
134. ay Use the correct procedure for your installation Install Concrete Floor Mounting on page 47 Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting on page 47 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 47 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Install Concrete Floor Mounting 1 Position the media gateway in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete 2 Insert a pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the media gateway and mark the floor directly beneath each hole 3 Rollthe media gateway out of the way and drill four 1 2 in 1 27 cm diameter holes about 1 5 in 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 2 4 Insert concrete floor anchors STARR part number 3425 into the holes 5 Rollthe media gateway back into place and align the media gateway holes over the concrete floor anchors Adjust the leveling legs until the media gateway is level See Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor on page 49 gt NOTE If the S8700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork the media gateways must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 in 0 3 cm 6 Securethe media gateway to the floor with the 4 supplied 3 8 16 x 4 5 in 11 4 cm bolts and four 3 8 in flat washers 7 Repeat this procedure for each medi
135. bels Main Distribution Frame Labels Label Graphic Symbols and Nomenclature on page 125 shows the graphic symbols used on labels for the S8700 Multi Connect configuration cross connections information outlets and cables The labels are color coded to identify S8700 Multi Connect configuration wiring Green To Central Office CO e Purple To 8700 Multi Connect configuration ports Yellow To auxiliary equipment and miscellaneous 8700 Multi Connect configuration leads Blue To information outlets White From Main Distribution Frame to satellite locations 3 pair Each label identifies 2 rows on the terminal block The upper half identifies the row above it and the lower half identifies the row below it The labels are inserted into the clear plastic designation strips furnished with the terminal blocks The strip is snapped in place between the terminal block rows Label code number 1220A comcode 103970000 contains all of the required labels Label Graphic Symbols and Nomenclature uo Ed lid Ad hide gt a 9 AO aeos Figure notes 1 Write Floor or Building Identification on 5 Information Outlet pepe ee Seduced 6 Site Satellite Closet 2 Media Gateway 7 Tie Circuit Carrier 8 Floor gt o 9 Building May 2002 126 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Off Premises Circuit Protection Off Premises Circuit Protection Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for
136. cable to the J58890CH unit See Temperature Sensor Cable Adapter Cables on page 58 Power Distribution Unit J58890CH pedf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery media gateway to J20 2 Carrier Circuit Breakers 3 Ground Terminal Block 4 Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here 5 Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 6 1AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to large battery media gateway For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative 7 Ground Terminal Block To AC load center or approved single point ground block May 2002 58 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Temperature Sensor Cable Adapter Cables H600 476 Adapter Cable Usage Group 1 G1 24 cell customer provided battery Group 3 G3 included 24 cell Avaya battery with battery media gateway Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 A CAUTION For a media gateway with a battery charger read the caution label on the 397C battery charger before disconnecting batteries Some media gateways contain a J58890CE 2 AC Power Distribution Unit without an optional battery charger Install the shorting cable only when a battery charger is not installed If you do not install the shorting cable or a battery charger then an alarm appears 1 Set the circuit breakers on the power
137. cation to the information outlets as previously described gt NOTE Bridged taps are not allowed on any part of the station wiring 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity _ KSE gt f 1764797a CJL 031396 Figure notes 1 Partof Main Distribution 7 To Media Gateway Three Pair Modularity Frame MDF 8 B25A Cable sete Conpeoune ROUES 9 Connectorized Staggered Finger Multiple 3 4 Pair Connecting Blocks 25 Pair Cable 4 Purple Field 10 258A or BR2580A Adapter 5 Blue Field 11 Information Outlet 6 Patch Cord or Cross Connect 12 4 Pair Circuit Jumpers 13 DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire May 2002 142 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location 9 9 o i r764798a CJL 030796 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 Station Side of MDF or Satellite Location 4 Pair Circuit Blue Field DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire Information Outlet 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location 1758532a CJL 031196 Figure notes o a Ff W N Part of MDF 7 To Media Gateway 3 pair 3 Pair Connecting Blocks modularity 4 Pair Connecting Blocks 8 A25D Cable 258A or BR2580A Adapter Purple Field 10 Information Outlet 11 4 Pair Circuit DIW station cable D Inside Wire Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers Blue Field May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi C
138. ced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified tech nicians The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public ser vice commission or corporation commission for information This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compati ble Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emission set out in the radio interference regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils manicures de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada
139. cessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Follow these steps to connect a modem to the Avaya 8700 Media Server 1 Connect a modem to one of the USB ports on each media server using the USB cable that comes with the modem 2 Connect one end of the modem line cord to the analog line port on each modem 3 Connect the other end of the line cord to the customer supplied remote access line gt NOTE Both modems connect to the same remote access line Presentation RJ11 of this line at each 8700 Media Server is locally engineered Installing Avaya Site Administration If you do not have ASA on your computer make sure your PC or laptop first meets the minimum requirements described in Minimum requirements to run ASA on page 269 Minimum requirements to run ASA Operating systems MS Windows 95 MS Windows 98 MS Windows NT 4 0 MS Windows 2000 Graphics adapter Floppy disk drive CD ROM Available hard disk space Printer port Network adapter Free serial ports Processor RAM 486SL 66 16 MB Pentium 32 MB Pentium 64 MB Pentium class 300 MHz 64 MB SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800 x 600 3 1 2 in 1 44 MB floppy disk drive CD ROM drive required to install ASA from CD A minimum of 100 MB free hard disk space is required The requirement for disk space depends on the size and number of configuration data sets Standard PC or network printer port is required for connecting to a printer to produce stati
140. connectors customer supplied Faceplate of VAL circuit pack fpdfval LJK 032101 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 181 Connecting to the Customer s Network Backplane Adapter addfipm2 KLC 083000 Figure notes 1 Amphenol connector attaches 2 RJ45 LAN cable connection to the back of the media gateway corresponding to the TN2501AP circuit pack slot e 100 Mbps uses Category 5 cable 10 Mbps uses Category 3 cable 3 This connector is not used for VAL Installing the TN2501AP Circuit Pack A WARNING To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD be sure to wear a grounding strap while handling the circuit pack 1 Insert the circuit pack into any port slot and close the latch securely At first the red and green LEDs are on steady then the green LED flashes If there are announcements on the circuit pack the amber LED flashes while the announcements are copied from FLASH to RAM After about 3 5 minutes all of the top 3 LEDs go out although the time is longer if there are announcements already recorded on the circuit pack gt NOTE If the TN2501AP circuit packs are at the MultiVantage software limit and you insert a VAL circuit pack the red LED on that circuit pack stays on indicating that the MultiVantage software does not accept it 2 Connect the backplane adapter to the Amphenol connector on the back of the media gateway corresponding to the TN2501AP circuit pack slot 3 Connec
141. ct Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Expanded Power Distribution Unit 1149 Battery 000000000000000 0000000000000000 1146 Power Distribution Unit gt On Battery Reserve 1145 Power U nit O Charging Battery Output Power On 0000000000000000 0004_1 PDH 062596 Figure notes 1 Wall Mounting Plate 4 First 1146B2 Power Distribution 2 Second 1146B2 Power Distribution Loi Unit 5 1145B2 Power Unit 3 T Cable H600 347 G7 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 231 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Install the Wall Mounting Plates The top plate is used for mounting the back up battery The bottom plate is used to mount the power supply and distribution units The plates can be rack mounted using standard rack mounting brackets See 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement on page 229 1 Locate one plate directly below the other one such that the AC power cord 6 5 feet or 2 meters reaches the electrical outlet from a power supply mounted on the bottom plate Both plates should be located so the raised letters are right side up gt NOTE A maximum of four power supplies can be powered from one dedicated 110 VAC 20 amp
142. ct 77 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack This section describes how to install Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stacks Typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack on page 77 shows a typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack Typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack May 2002 78 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Perform these tasks before you begin the installation e Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways on page 79 e Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 107 e Check Circuit Packs on page 79 Correct Shipping Errors on page 45 Perform these steps to install the media gateways e Position the Media Gateway Stacks on page 80 or Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional on page 46 Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway on page 80 if required Av WARNING 8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding must comply with the general rule
143. cting the media gateways to the approved ground determine the best method of grounding See Approved Grounds for more information Also locate the approved ground as close to the media gateways as possible gt NOTE The ground plates and media gateway clips are installed later in this procedure Task List Connect the AC Grounds e Connect AC Power Ground on page 94 e Set the Ringer Frequency on page 96 e Connect the Power Cord into the Power Receptacle on page 96 Connect AC Power Ground 1 Measure and cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the media gateway stack single point ground block and the approved ground See Typical AC Power and Ground Layout Rear on page 95 2 Atthe lower left rear of the expansion control media gateway A connect the 6 AWG 440 4 mm ground wire to the media gateway stack single point ground block 3 Run the ground wire to the approved ground and attach securely 4 Repeat Steps 1 3 for each expansion control media gateway A gt NOTE If the media gateway stacks are remotely located in a separate room or building run the 6 AWG 40 4 mm media gateway ground wire to an approved protective ground 5 Atexpansion control media gateway A connect a 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the single point ground block The 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire must be long enough to reach the telecommunications cables at the rear of
144. cuit pack Digital Trunk 3 Referto the Job Aid entitled Option Switch Settings for detailed information 4 Administer on the DS1 and Trunk Group Screens of the management terminal Refer to the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more details May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 193 Installing and Wiring Telephones Digital Tie Trunk Wiring 9 o gt O 9 lt 54 9 gt 2 Q O gt 7 amp dig_tie RBP 040596 Figure notes 1 External Trunk 4 LO Balanced Output Pair 2 Digital Trunk Circuit Pack Position 1C06 5 LI 3 LO 6 LlI Balanced Input Pair DS1 Tie Trunk Example Digital Signal Level 1 DS1 tie trunks provide a 1 544 Mbps T1 or 2 048 Mbps E1 digital data service between two collocated configurations or between the configuration and a data network See these examples e Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks on page 193 e DSI Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit on page 194 For cable descriptions see e DSI Cables on page 195 e Pinout of C6F Cable on page 195 Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks Two DS1 tie trunk circuit packs can be in collocated configurations A DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack in one configuration can be connected to a DS1 in another configuration A C6D cable can be used if the distance is less than 50 feet 15 2 m If the distance is between 50 feet 15 2 m and 1310 feet 399 m use a C6E cable gt NOTE The ma
145. cuit pack If necessary reseat the circuit pack to begin the programming sequence For high and critical reliability configurations make sure the IPSI being programmed is the standby tone clock gt NOTE You must do the following steps within 5 seconds after inserting the circuit pack 2 Inserta pen golf tee or similar object no graphite pencil into the recessed push button switch May 2002 256 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware CHINO fpdiled3 LUK 022502 d gt NOTE If you have only one multi connect configuration the default switch ID is A which was administered earlier The second configuration would be B and so on The switch ID is not the carrier letter 3 While the display is flashing press the button until the switch ID A through J shows on the top character of the LED display When the correct letter shows stop It will flash a few times 5 seconds then stop The next character down will begin to flash gt NOTE If you pass up the letter number you want you must either cycle through all the letters numbers to get to the letter number you want or reinsert reseat the circuit pack and start at the beginning gt NOTE The number to program is the cabinet number not the port network number If you have more than one IPSI in a cabinet they all have the same cabinet number even if it is a split cabinet with 2 or more port networks 4 While the first digi
146. d Administration To connect the trunk pairs to the purple field 1 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and the sneak fuse panels See 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks on page 155 2 Connect A25D B25A cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block type connecting block connectors in the green field 3 Connect I pair patch cords jumper wires from each 110 type terminal block row in the green field to the 110 type terminal block rows in the purple field for 1 pair Central Office CO trunks or in 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks on page 156 for 3 pair tie trunks 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 9 4 7 1013 16 19 22 1 4 7 1013 16 19 22 9 9 1758425b MMR 031496 Figure notes 1 Green Field 3 Pairs 2 l Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field May 2002 156 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks 9 9 123452678 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 123 45 67 8 9 101112 9 123452678 9 101112 9 1758537b MMR 031496 Figure notes Green Field 3 Pairs 1 Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field Install Cables
147. d between stacked media gateways Port Media Gateway B Screws to Loosen May 2002 100 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection Ground plates are installed between stacked media gateways provide the ground connection between media gateways provide radio frequency RF radiation protection and help stabilize the media gateways 1 Loosen the four screws at the bottom of the top media gateway and at the top of the media gateway underneath it See Rear Panel Screw Locations on page 99 Align the mounting holes in the rear ground plate over the bottom screws in the top media gateway See Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View on page 101 Align the mounting holes in the ground plate with the four holes at the top of the media gateway below the top media gateway Slide the mounting plate down to seat on the Screws Check all Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cables and the Inter Cabinet Cables ICC to be sure they are not pinched by the plates Repeat Steps 1 3 until the rear ground plates are installed between all stacked media gateways Do not tighten the screws yet Rear Panel Screw Locations UNS Wt MUUN Ml grnd plt CJL 030696 Figure notes 1 Expansion Co
148. d for the DC Powered Distribution Unit on page 86 2 Atthe cabinet connect a the 6 AWG 240 164 mm wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar 3 Route the opposite end of the wire to the DC powered Distribution Unit and connect the wire to the GRD connector 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each remaining DC powered Distribution Unit May 2002 86 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground for the DC Powered Distribution Unit j58890r1 RBP 042296 Figure notes 1 DC power cabinet DC Power Distribution Unit Ground Discharge Bar 6 AWG 40 4 mm2 Wire GRD Connector Terminal on DC Powered Distribution Unit To Additional DC Powered Distribution Units if required Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground Cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the GROUND DISCHARGE bar on the DC power cabinet and the single point ground block on the expansion control media gateway A bottom media gateway in Ground for Media Gateway on page 87 At the DC power cabinet connect the wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar Route the wire to expansion control media gateway A and connect to the single point ground block Repeat for each expansion control media gateway A in the 8700 Multi Connect configuration room May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Gr
149. d protector installing 213 4 pair station circuits 140 808A emergency transfer panel 214 215 217 A AC power 96 107 108 checking voltage 72 connecting 59 connecting to DC power cabinet 65 ground wiring 51 52 53 94 grounding 49 94 single phase 50 three phase 50 AC power receptacle location 80 AC DC mixed power and ground 67 AC DC powered cabinet connecting 67 access media server directly 266 remotely over modem 268 remotely over network 268 adapter 258A 356A BR2580A ZD8AJ 136 451A extender 138 adapters TN2302AP Amphenol adapter 173 address plugs cabinet 98 adjunct power 188 189 connection locations 200 administer C LAN 175 IP Media Processor 175 IPSI 38 IPSI circuit pack 254 administering patch cords and jumpers 150 administration terminals 147 alarm connections 204 alarm wiring 190 alarms 272 296 terminal alarm notification 277 view 263 analog line circuit protectors 211 analog station wiring 190 analog telephones 209 analog tie trunk wiring 192 announcement playback procedure 293 announcements deleting 293 recording 293 testing 293 ASA installing 269 set up for active media server 37 set up for dedicated services port 36 attendant console 201 maximum cabling distance 188 attendant console LEDs 272 277 attendant console cabling distances 201 attendant console installing 203 attendant console testing 292 authentication file
150. de wiring cable gt NOTE The ground wires are connected to the CBC as instructed in Cabling Port Networks on page 116 Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets gt NOTE The wire in the next step must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Measure and cut a minimum of a 1 AWG 70 44 mm wire long enough to reach between the ground connection terminal in the DC Battery cabinet and the Ground Discharge Bar in the DC Power cabinet See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 60 2 Crimp terminal lugs on each end of the wire Terminal lugs are furnished as part of D 181895 Kit of Parts Comcode 105434559 3 Atthe DC power cabinet connect the wire to the Ground Discharge Bar 4 Route the wire through one of the holes in the side of the cabinets and terminate it on the Ground Connection Terminal in the DC battery cabinet Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground gt NOTE The wire must be at least as large as the largest distribution wire in the S8700 Multi Connect configuration required by UL In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 1 AWG 70 44 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 60 2 Route the ground wire out of the cabinet and terminate it on the approved ground The approved ground
151. distribution unit OFF See Shorting Cable Installation on page 58 2 At the rear of the media gateway insert the shorting cable H600 442 G1 into J11 The cable is keyed so it can fit only 1 way Shorting Cable Installation psdfsht KLC 111296 Figure notes 1 Shorting Cable H600 442 G1 1f battery charger is not installed 2 Jil May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 59 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect AC Power 1 Set the main circuit breakers on the power distribution unit OFF 2 Connect media gateway AC line cords to the AC power receptacles gt NOTE Do not power up the 8700 Multi Connect configuration at this time Connect DC Power and Ground A CAUTION Grounding of the 8700 Multi Connect configuration shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70 For more information refer to Approved Grounds jj The grounding methods for the DC powered 8700 Multi Connect configuration are more complex than that of an AC powered 8700 Multi Connect configuration Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 60 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power cabinet The size of the wire required for the 48 volt DC and 48 volt return must ensure the voltage supplied by the battery plant is maintained between 42 5 and 54 2 volts DC at all times for proper operation and to preven
152. djunct device Alarm Inputs at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector White Blue AP1 Pin 26 Major Alarm Input Blue White Ground Pin 1 White Orange AP2 Pin 27 Minor Alarm Input Orange White Ground Pin 2 Alarm Output at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector Violet Green EXTALMA Pin 48 Alarm Output Green Violet EXTALMB Pin 23 Ground Alarm Output May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 205 Installing and Wiring Telephones Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power Color AUX Connector Black Green XFER48 Emergency Transfer Pin 36 Green Black Ground Pin 11 Black Slate ACC48A Adjunct 48 VDC Pin 19 Slate Black Ground Pin 44 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires The external alarm plug should already be connected to the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit The pinout for the connector is shown in External Alarm Connector Pinout on page 206 gt NOTE RS 232 alarms RXD DTR DSR TXD RS 232 GRD and RTS are not supported on the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit 1 Choose an alarm to connect such as Battery Interface Failure 2 Choose the port circuit pack to use and its carrier and slot number from Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 191 For example TN2183 Analog Line Cabinet 1 Carrier C Slot 1 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack for example Port 3 4 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the named pins
153. dware cadsrib2 KLC 032602 10 12 13 Plug the ribbon cable into the top connector on the component side of the TN775D maintenance circuit pack Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place Thread the ribbon cable through the remaining slot on the faceplate of the TN775D circuit pack Route the cable through the TDM slot in the back of the SCC1 media gateway A and up to SCC1 media gateway B May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 247 Connect the Hardware cadsrib4 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 TDM cable slot 2 Media Gateway A 14 Use the pass through tool to feed the long ribbon cable through media gateway B 15 Connectthe long cable to the connector on the component side of the TN2312AP IPSI in media gateway A May 2002 248 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware 16 Fully insert the TN775D and TN2312AP circuit packs 17 Ifthe CAT 5 Ethernet cables have already been run to the IPSI circuit packs replace the upper and lower rear covers Replace the ground plate 18 Ifthe CAT 5 Ethernet cables have not been run to the IPSI circuit packs go to Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs on page 249 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 249 Connect the Hardware R S lt
154. e If satisfied hang up Delete Announcement 1 Dialthe access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number 2 When you hear a dial tone press 3 to delete the announcement and end the recording session A confirmation tone is heard when the announcement is deleted Test Music on Hold Verify music is provided to a held party during any hold interval Test Emergency Transfer 88700 Multi Connect only Put configuration in emergency transfer mode and make call using emergency transfer telephone There may be up to 4 Emergency Transfer panels on a wall in the phone closet depending on the configuration May 2002 294 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Test Remote Access Interface Test the communication link between the media server and the remote access interface and verify the alarm notification process Make a remote test from the remote interface to the Avaya S8700 Media Server and a local test from the Avaya S8700 Media Server to the remote interface In some countries this remote access interface is not allowed Contact your Avaya representative Test Terminating Trunk Transmission The Terminating Trunk Transmission Test provides for extension number access to 3 tone sequences that can be used for trunk transmission testing from the distant end of the trunks 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter and go to screen 2 2 Under TERMINATIN
155. e satellite or adapter locations Keep the number of locations to a minimum To minimize the station wiring distances centrally locate the sites satellites or adapters among the information outlets e Site satellite locations must be easily accessible and contain AC powered receptacles One 258A BR2580A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 4 pair station circuits One 356A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 3 pair station circuits Hardware requirements are the same as for the equipment room Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of the station cables required per the standard SYSTIMAX wiring concepts Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of each 25 pair station cable The cables must be selected and properly sized to make maximum use of the hardware at the equipment room or satellite location May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 149 Layout Use 25 pair B25A cables to connect adapters directly to the MDF or satellite location Staggered finger cables equipped with factory installed 25 pair connectors at both ends should be used when multiple 25 pair cables are used between the equipment room or satellite location and the adapters B25A cables are required at the equipment room or satellite location to connect the staggered finge
156. e if you fail to follow Avaya s recommendations for configuration operation and use of the equipment YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU ARE AWARE OF THESE RISKS AND THAT YOU HAVE DETERMINED THEY ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR YOUR APPLICATION OF THE EQUIP MENT YOU ALSO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT UNLESS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANOTHER AGREEMENT YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR 1 ENSURING THAT YOUR NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS ARE ADEQUATELY SECURED AGAINST UNAUTHORIZED INTRUSION AND 2 BACKING UP YOUR DATA AND FILES Standards Compliance Avaya Inc is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substi tution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Com munications Commission FCC Rules the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc could void the user s authority to operate this equipment The equipment described in this manual complies with standards of the following organizations and laws as applicable Australian Communications Agency ACA American National Standards Institute ANSI Canadian Standards Association CSA Committee for European Electrotechnical Standardization CENELEC European Norms EN s Digital Pri
157. e required tools on site Refer to the Installation Tool Information S8 amp 700 Multi Connect for the list of required tools Verify that you have the current translations available through ProVision if the existing DEFINITY ECS does not have an optical drive Verify that you have the current software firmware and required patches This is not the software firmware and any patches that are pre loaded on the 8700 Media Server but what will be upgraded to after installation Downloading License and Authentication Files Use the License File Remote Feature Activation RFA to obtain the license and authentication files RFA is a Web based application available to Avaya employees and authorized Business Partners that enables the creation and deployment of license files for all switches The license file enables the switch s software category release features and capacities License files are created using SAP order information and or current customer configuration information Without a license file the switch does not provide normal call processing Without a valid license installed or a mismatched license The system generates a major alarm Depending upon the nature of the error a 6 day countdown timer starts but call processing continues unchanged May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 17 Pre installation Setup If the countdown timer expires the switch runs in Administration Mode only and the call process
158. eceptacle Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Provide power for the clock cabinet from the same DC power plant as the 58700 Media Server for Multi connect configuration Ground the clock cabinet to the DC power plant Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding 1 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the clock cabinet to the ground discharge bar in the DC power plant Insert 1 end of the wire into the ground lug on the clock cabinet and tighten the screw Attach the lug to the receptacle cover Be sure the lug and cabinet ground wires connect to separate screws on the receptacle cover Route the ground wire to the DC power plant and connect to DISCH GRD inside the cabinet Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power Set the clock cabinet circuit breaker at the DC power plant OFF At the clock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to the 48V terminal on the terminal strip At the clock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the 48V RTN terminal on the terminal strip Route the wires out of the cabinet and to the DC power plant At the DC power plant connect the 48V wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker At the DC power plant connect the 48 VRTN wire to the DISCH GRD bar May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 109 Install the Stratum 3 clock Set the Clock Options There are four sets of option switches on the clock 1 Set the options on the Clock Input
159. elephones on page 210 shows the connections for 1 to 8 off premises analog telephones Connections to 24 Out of Building Telephones on page 211 shows the connections for up to 24 off premises analog telephones Concentrations of analog line pairs are used at both buildings to minimize the off premises wiring required At the MDF jumpers must be connected between 1 row connecting block in the white field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field At the station location a WP 90929 List 1 Concentrator Cable is used There are 8 station appearances on each of the 3 fingers of the concentrator cable The maximum distance from the media gateway to the out of building telephone is 6000 feet 1828 8 meters using 24 AWG 5 0 5 mm wire May 2002 210 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones The maximum range of out of building analog telephones 500 2500 or 7100 types connected to an analog line circuit pack should be such that the maximum loop resistance does not exceed 1300 ohms Connections for 1 to 8 Out of Building Analog Telephones 8888 T nnnn p000 8383 mmm nnn Dann crdfobt CJL 101396 Figure notes 1 Locally Engineered Cables and Equipment 8 Partof Main Distribution 2 Out of Building Wiring Pame MDE 3 25 Pair Connector 3 peau 4 Multi Pair Protector Units Primary 19 Mote Calewa yee Protectors with He
160. emove the panel from service and replace it with a new panel Check for transfer operation as follows e Place the test switch switch 12 in the ACTIVATED position The power LED should be OFF e Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met remove the panel from service and replace it with a new panel Trunk Test Switches Switch Number Circuit Number o y QN tA A U N e El e WO UU NY NO Ml e May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 219 Installing and Wiring Telephones Trunk Test Switches Continued Switch Number Circuit Number 9 10 11 12 5 5 Not Used Test Switch Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector 26 1 27 2 28 9 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 W BL BL W W O O W W G G W W BR BR W W S S W R BL BL R R O O R R G G R R BR BR R R S S R BK BL BL BK BK O O BK BK G TTCI RTCI TTKI RTKI TLCI RLCI TSTI RSTI TTC2 RTC2 TTK2 RTK2 TLC2 RLC2 TST2 RST2 TTC3 RTC3 TTK3 RTK3 TLC3 RLC3 TST3 RST3 TTC4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 1 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 1 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 1 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 1 Tip PBX Line Port 1 Ring PBX Line Port 1 Tip Emergency Terminal 1 Ring Emergency Terminal 1 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 2 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 2 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 2 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 2 Tip PBX Line Port 2 Ring PBX Line Port 2 Tip Emergency Terminal 2
161. ent Record form 150 port cabinet jumper fields 98 port circuit pack pin designations 191 198 207 positioning 107 power single phase 240VAC 50 power cabinet ground connecting approved DC ground 64 power cabinet grounds connecting DC 64 power distribution unit 205 236 power receptacles 80 power supplies for telephones installing and wiring 226 power supply 233 1151A1 48V 236 1151A2 48V 236 power supply inspecting 79 PPN cabinets cabinet location 45 80 pre installation setup 16 primary protectors off premises connections 211 212 Programmable circuit packs TN2302AP 171 protection electromagnetic 101 provisioning plan 118 N National Electrical Code grounding rules 49 83 94 network ITS connecting 173 night ringing testing 292 Q queue warning indicator 225 queue warning indicator testing 293 May 2002 306 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Index R recorded announcement testing 293 rectifier module installing 60 register 8700 multi connect configuration 265 remote access testing 294 remote access to media server over modem 268 over network 268 remote access testing 294 remote network interface 208 remote power off cable connecting 69 reporting circuit pack damage or discrepancies 45 79 reporting damage 43 44 78 returning equipment 45 RF shielding 101 RFA overview 16 ribbon cables connect on SCC1 243 ringer frequency settings 96 ringin
162. er Y BR 44 GND AUX Power BR Y 19 48 Y S 45 GND S Y 20 48 V BL 46 GND BL V 21 48 V O 47 Not Connected O V 22 V G 48 Ext Alarm A G V 23 Ext Alarm Return V BR 49 Not Connected BR V 24 V S 50 INADS Tip S V 25 INADS Ring Color designation is the main wire color and the color of the stripe on the wire The following wire colors apply W White BL Blue O Orange G Green BR Brown S Slate Grey R Red BK Black Y Yellow V Violet External alarm with signal incoming to media server External alarm with signal outgoing from media server Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T BRI with Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 1 TXT 2 TXR T 3 PXT TXT 4 T PXR T May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 199 Installing and Wiring Telephones Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations Continued 8510T BRI with Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection 4 pin 7 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC modular 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD jack GRD Circuit TN754 TN2181 TN556 TN2183 TN2198 Pack 4 wire 2 wire digital ISDN BRI Analog line 2 wire Basic digital 8 16 port Line 16 port Rate Interface port TN2224 line 2 wire digital 24 port PX PBX transmitT Tip A TX Ter
163. er to adjunct equipment such as S201A and CS201A speakerphones or a 500A Headset Adapter attached to any currently manufactured analog DCP or ISDN T telephone equipped with an adjunct jack CAUTION The power supply can be used only with telecommunications equipment indoors and in a controlled environment The power supply has a single output of 48 VDC 0 4 Amps and can operate from either a 120 VAC 60 Hz power source 105 to 129 VAC or a 220 230 240 VAC 50 Hz power source 198 to 264 VAC Input voltage selection is automatic The output capacity is 19 2 watts The power supply can be placed on a flat surface such as a desk For wall mounting keyhole slots are provided on the bottom of the chassis CAUTION Do not locate the unit within six inches 15 cm of the floor May 2002 238 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 is a standard no battery backup power supply unit The 1151A2 is a battery backup version of the 1151A1 Either power supply can support one telephone with or without an adjunct The maximum loop range is 250 feet 76 meters Two modular jacks are used Power is provided on the PHONE jack pins 7 and 8 and respectively The PHONE and LINE jacks are 8 pin female non keyed 657 type jacks that can accept D4 D6 and D8 modular plug cables See an 1151A1 2 Power Supply Front on page 238
164. erminal Blocks 900 Pair on page 160 This arrangement allows for growth on the right side of the MDF 1 10 Route the cables from the rear of the media gateway stack to the MDF via the Cable Slack Manager on page 134 See Install Cable Slack Managers on page 162 If you are installing 300 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 47 5 in 1 2 m above the floor See 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair on page 159 If you are installing 900 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 23 in 58 4 cm above the floor See 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair on page 160 To mount the first trunk auxiliary field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 in 12 wood screws 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm apart on the left side of the horizontal line on the wall Slide the bottom terminal block ft onto the mounting screws and mark the upper mounting screw locations Remove the terminal block and partially install the upper mounting screws Place the terminal block on the mounting screws and tighten the screws If installing a vertical patch cord trough partially install the first screw for the patch cord trough on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 5 31 in 13 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 If another trunk auxiliary field terminal block is to be
165. es are obtained at http support avaya com If an Internet connection is available through the customer s network firmware files can be downloaded directly to the servers If an Internet connection is not available firmware files will have to be made available from the services laptop Use the Upload Files to Server via browser to move files from the laptop to the server Use the Download Files to Server from web to move files from a server on the web to the S8700 Media Server gt NOTE It is acceptable to download new firmware to an active IPSI However whenever possible activate the new firmware in a standby IPSI 4 WEB For inservice systems click Activate IPSI Upgrade and select an individual standby high critical configurations IPSI and Begin activation now to activate the new IPSI firmware Repeat this step for each standby IPSI equipped For duplex configurations brief service interruptions are unavoidable Schedule IPSI activation for a low traffic period of time on the Activate IPSI Upgrade screen May 2002 261 262 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Completing the Installation Administration ASA For inservice systems high critical configurations move the active IPSI by using the set ipserver interface cab carrier command Issue this command for each IPSI equipped cabinet WEB Repeat step 4 with the new standby IPSIs WEB Click on View Firmware Activation Status to determine when the activation is com
166. ese tasks to connect AC power and ground 1 Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway on page 52 or Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway on page 53 Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 on page 55 Connect Small Battery Holdover on page 56 or Connect Large Battery Holdover on page 57 Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 on page 58 Connect AC Power on page 59 Power Requirements s8700 Multi Connect configuration Power Requirements Maximum DEFINITY UL Rating Label Power Capacity 208 240 120 Iac In Max W In BTU Hr 24 3245 11071 26 21 3276 11177 71 40 3120 10645 44 Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 The connect AC power and ground procedures apply to the AC powered media gateways Any of these power sources can supply 60 Hz power to the AC load Single phase 4 wire 120 240 VAC supplying 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE Single phase 4 wire 120 208 VAC supplying 208 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE Single phase 3 wire 208 or 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires and 1 ground wire J58890CH May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 51 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Either of these power sources can supply 50 Hz power to the AC load e Non US 5 wire Y 220 380 VAC T
167. ests on this circuit pack as part of background maintenance or demand testing This LED is also lit during initialization tests when a circuit pack is inserted or reset Yellow Busy The circuit pack is currently in use May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 281 Testing the Complete Configuration Circuit Pack LEDs on Faceplate fpdfled LJK 101596 Figure notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 Latch Pin 2 Test LED Green 5 Locking Lever 3 Busy LED Yellow DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs Eleven LEDs provide an indication of the state of the TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs and the T1 E1 facilities The top group has the standard red green and yellow LEDs The red LED indicates an alarm condition and the green LED indicates testing in progress The 4 SPAN LEDs indicate the status of the T1 E1 facilities The four STATUS LEDs are currently unused and remain off May 2002 282 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs OO ruwa SOOS9S99sg O O DH S3 D fpd dsi LJK 101596 Figure notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 STATUS LEDs 2 Test LED Green 5 SPAN LEDs 3 Busy LED Yellow The yellow LED is used to indicate the state of the fiber interface the fiber channel the control channel and the communications link to the SPE in the following manner and order of priority See DS1 Converter Yellow LED Flashi
168. f the media gateway as possible May 2002 252 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware cadscat4 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 Clamp on ferrite 2 Media Gateway A 4 Connect the green CATS cable to the bottom connector on the front of the TN2312AP IPSI circuit pack in media gateway A May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 253 Connect the Hardware cadscat3 KLC 032602 Replace the rear covers and the ground plate Dress the CAT5 Ethernet cable to exit either the left or right side of the media gateway May 2002 254 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware ELEM Ss SSS SSS SS cadscat5 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Ground Plate 6 Forhigh or critical reliability repeat steps 1 through 5 for the IPSI circuit pack in media gateway B using a red CAT5 Ethernet cable 7 Replace the upper and lower rear covers Replace the ground plate Program the IPSI circuit packs IP server interface circuit packs get IP addresses in one of two ways Using dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP most common Using static IP addressing less common The IPSI circuit packs associated with the 8700 Media Server for Multi connect configurations use the DHCP method In rare cases the 8700 Multi connect IPSIs may use the static addressing method May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 255 Connect the Hardware IPSI circui
169. female cable connector These adapters divide the 25 pair cable into six 4 pair modular jack circuits See 258A and BR2580A Adapters on page 138 May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 137 Station Wiring Design The 356A adapter plugs into a 25 pair female cable connector See 356A Adapter on page 139 The 356A adapter divides the 25 pair cable into eight 3 pair circuits Although the circuits are 3 pair the adapters modular jacks will accept the 8 wide modular plug used on the 4 pair station cable CAUTION Adapters wired similarly to the 356A should not be used Their jacks do not accept 4 pair plugs Use theZD8AJ adapter to connect a Multi button Electronic Telephone MET line cord to an information outlet The adapter interchanges pairs 3 and 4 to correspond with the pair assignments for the telephone The line cord plugs into the adapter and then the adapter plugs into an information outlet Satellite Locations Satellite locations are closets that provide an administration point using cross connect equipment for station cables and where adjunct power may be applied The station cable circuits from the equipment room MDF are 3 pair At the satellite location 4 pair circuits run to the information outlets The hardware used is 110 type terminal blocks Satellite Locations Using 110 Type Hardware Each terminal block has a 3 pair white field and a 4 pair blue field located on the same term
170. for sneak current protection and the ITW Linx is equipped with replaceable fuses for sneak current protection gt NOTE The TN2181 16 Port Two Wire Digital Line circuit pack may not be approved for some out of building uses Contact your Avaya representative for more information The 4C3S 75 may be used only with Vintage 14 or newer TN754 circuit packs or TN754B circuit packs Digital Voice Circuit Protectors on page 213 lists the approved protectors When possible all new and reused wiring installations should use blocks that accept the standard 5 pin plug in 4C3S 75 protector However there are reused wiring installations where this may not be cost effective For these installations the ITW Linx protector may be installed May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 213 Installing and Wiring Telephones An example of this is where screw type carbon block protectors or other non plug compatible types are in place and it is too costly to re terminate the outside plant cable on a 5 pin mounting block for only a few out of building terminals Installing the ITW Linx Enhanced Protector The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector can be installed in series with existing primary protection The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector mounts directly on connecting blocks and requires a separate ground bar Installing the 4C3S 75 Enhanced Protector The 4C3S 75 protector cannot be installed in series with other types of primary protection It
171. fy Port Media Gateway Address Plugs 98 May 2002 8 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Install Rear Panels 99 Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection 100 Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection 101 Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection 103 Connect S8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables 104 Installing an Avaya G700 Media Gateway 106 Install the Stratum 3 clock 107 Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 107 Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 107 Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 107 Check and Connect Commercial AC Power 108 Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 108 Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding 108 Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power 108 Set the Clock Options 109 Cable the Stratum 3 Clock 110 Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring 112 Cabling Port Networks 116 Information about Installing the Cabling 116 Installing the Telecommunications Cabling 117 Provisioning Plan 118 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware 119 MDF Cross Connect Fields 122 Main Distribution Frame 123 Main Distribution Frame Labels 125 Off Premises Circuit Protection 126 Sneak Fuse Panels 127 Cable Installation 128 Equipment Room Cabling Labels 128 Cable Routing Guidelines 129 Control Carrier Outp
172. g 43 44 78 data link protector installing 213 date and time verify 29 DC distribution unit connecting to DC power cabinet 85 DC power 59 64 108 battery interface module installing 60 connecting battery and power cabinet grounds 64 connecting battery cabinet to power cabinet 67 connecting cabinets 66 connecting distribution unit to power cabinet 85 connecting ground wires 65 rectifier module installing 60 DC power cabinet 65 approved ground 64 connecting SCC ground 86 DC power connections 87 DC power connecting cabinet grounds 83 DC power receptacle location 80 DC AC mixed ground and power 67 DHCP addressing IPSI circuit pack 254 DHCP IP addressing using 255 DID trunk wiring 190 digital line circuit protectors 212 digital tie trunk wiring 192 direct access to media server 266 direct connect systems 72 direct department calling testing queue warning indicator 293 disable unused Ethernet switch ports 262 DS1 converter circuit pack LEDs 281 DS1 tie trunks wiring 193 duplicated media server interchange testing 285 duplication cables connect 29 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect 303 Index E earthquake protection 100 101 earthquake protection MCC 46 47 earthquake protection SCC 80 electromagnetic compatibility standards 3 electromagnetic shielding 101 emergency transfer panel installing 217 emergency transfer telephones 222 223 emergency transfer units 214 emergency tr
173. g testing 292 routing cables to MDF 129 S 8700 IP Connect testing complete configuration 271 S8700 media server connecting to LAN 168 LEDs 272 testing LEDs 273 8700 Multi Connect testing complete configuration 271 safety instructions 1145B power supply 227 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supply 236 SCC connecting battery 93 earthquake protection 80 SCC control cabinet connecting to DC power cabinet 86 security certificate install Internet Explorer 23 install Netscape 22 selector console 204 selector console testing 292 service states checking 283 set static IP address 257 shielding electromagnetic 101 shipping errors 45 shipping packing lists 43 78 SHOCKWATCH indicators 44 shorting cable 58 single phase 240VAC 50 site locations adapters 135 sneak current protection 127 sneak current protection installing 164 sneak current protectors off premises connections 211 212 sneak fuse panel space requirements 134 sneak fuse panels 127 134 sneak fuse panels installing 164 SNMP traps configure 28 space requirements 110 type hardware 134 cable slack manager 134 sneak fuse panels 134 SPAN LEDs 283 stabilizing cabinets for earthquake protection 100 101 standard reliability systems cabling 104 standards electromagnetic compatibility 3 standby server busy out 32 static addressing IPSI circuit pack 254 static IP addressing setting 257 station cables sizing 148 station cable
174. go 999 o o o o o o 9995 9998q b o 26050 o9o 69686 e o e e e 3 e e e OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 5 oog 000000000000000000000000000000000000 o oo 000000000000000000000000000000000000 rye oe G 000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 amp Oo UU o E p OO 9997 29 0000000000 ae oo OOOO00000000 OOo amp 00000 o xl Hte z E HH eee S d SES SSSU SS o EPI ESSPPPPPPIS J ESSI PPP scdlled KLC 030502 Figure notes 1 Power 7 U2 not defined Configuration fault 8 4NIC ports the numbers indicate their assigned Ethernet ports 9 LEDs for the NIC ports Hard drive activity Network activity CNA 10 LEDs for fiber optic duplication connectivity 11 Status LED not used Service configuration health o oa A WO N Active or standby mode indicator Testing the Media Server LEDs You can test some of the LEDs on the front of the media server through the media server web interface This makes sure that the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the front of the media server and the transmit LED on the DAJ1 duplication memory card on the back of the media server are controllable and not burned out and that the media server is not hung gt NOTE The U2 LED is controlled by the 8700 Media Server but does not have an assigned function
175. grade or know that you are going to do an upgrade during the Media Server installation process The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 27 Configure the Hardware in the Rack 1 Click Install License select Install new license then click the Install License button to install the license files Install License C Undo last install C Install new license Install License About This Screen 2 Installing the Avaya authentication file removes all default passwords and establishes new ones After the installation services logins specific to the media server are protected through Access Security Gateway ASG 3 Click Install Avaya Authentication gt Install to install the Avaya authentication file Verify media server 1 connection to customer s LAN The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to server 1 using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface You also need a customer representative with knowledge of the customer s LAN configuration and access to a desktop on the LAN 1 Connect a customer supplied CATS cable from server 1 port Eth4 to the customer s LAN Refer to Getting Started with Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration 2 On the 58700 Media Server Web Interface click on Execute Ping Execute Ping Select Host o
176. gress the 808A maintains the connection until the user goes on hook Each 808A can handle up to five Central Office CO trunks May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 215 Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples 808A Emergency Transfer Panel on page 216 shows a typical 808A Emergency Transfer Panel The 808A connects to the Main Distribution Frame MDF with B25A or A25B cable The panel can be installed on any mounting frame in either a vertical or horizontal position The housing has ears for screw mounting and cutouts for snap mounting the unit in an 89 type mounting bracket See 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Mounting on page 217 Task List Typical Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel on page 217 Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 222 e Install Telephones Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 223 May 2002 216 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Figure notes EMERGENCY TRANSFER PANEL TRUNK TEST SWITCHES CIRCUIT TRUNK OPTION J 1 LOOP GROUND a 2 START START BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE TRUNK OPTION
177. he option of using the 44 57 VDC 15A to boost the InLine power The P333T PWR can be placed in a wiring closet or on a flat stable surface like a desk Screws are provided for mounting in a standard 19 inch rack May 2002 242 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Connect the Hardware Connect the Hardware This section covers the following tasks Connect Server UPS and IPSI cables to Ethernet Switch es on page 242 Connect Avaya SCC media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables on page 243 Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs on page 249 e Avaya MCCI Media Gateway on page 249 e Avaya SCCI Media Gateway on page 250 Program the IPSI circuit packs on page 254 e Using DHCP addressing on page 255 e Using static addressing on page 257 Verify connectivity to the media servers on page 260 Connect Server UPS and IPSI cables to Ethernet Switch es Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations for a connectivity guide May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 243 Connect the Hardware Connect Avaya SCC1 media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables 1 Remove the ground plate upper and lower rear covers from the SCC media gateway s Sum SN Sy SSX LL gt SSS go SSS SS cadscat1 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media
178. he 88700 Multi Connect Installation Space Requirements Installation Space Requirements This section has information about Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units on page 134 110 Type Hardware on page 134 Cable Slack Manager on page 134 Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units Approximately eight inches 20 cm of horizontal wall space is required for each column of sneak fuse panels Horizontal wall space must also be provided for emergency transfer units 110 Type Hardware The trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field are mounted on the same wall Each 110P type terminal block is 8 5 inches 21 6 cm wide Vertical patch cord troughs are 5 31 inches 13 4 cm wide and horizontal patch cord troughs are 23 inches 58 4 cm wide Each 110A type terminal block is 10 81 inches 27 4 cm wide however no horizontal patch cord troughs are used and the blocks are shorter than 110P type terminal blocks This allows the 110A type terminal blocks to be stacked Therefore the 1 10A type hardware requires less space than the 110P type hardware on a per station basis Cable Slack Manager A Cable Slack Manager is 32 inches 81 3 cm wide Slack managers are commonly used in installations consisting of media gateway stacks The quantity of slack managers is determined by dividing the total length of the Main Distribution Frame MDF in inches cm by 32 81 3 A partial number of 0 4 or less shou
179. he Complete Configuration Test Queue Warning Indicator Make a test call to an extension associated with a Uniform Call Distribution UCD or Direct Department Calling DDC group and verify the queue warning indicator lamp lights If the queue warning indicator has not been installed by customer connect a spare telephone to the information outlet reserved for queue warning indicator and make a test call Test Integrated Announcement The TN750B C and TN2501AP Announcement circuit packs provide the ability to store messages The messages can be recorded from telephones on or off premises and have flexible message lengths The telephone selected as the test telephone must have a class of service COS with console permission enabled Record Announcement 1 Selecta test telephone with console permissions enabled 2 Dialthe access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number 3 When you hear a dial tone press 1 When you hear a beep or stutter tone speak the announcement into the telephone 4 When done press if a digital phone or hang up if an analog phone to stop the recording You then hear a dial tone Playback Announcement 1 If using a digital phone press 2 to hear the announcement When the announcement is over you hear a dial tone If satisfied hang up 2 Ifusing an analog phone dial the integrated announcement extension number to hear the announcement When the announcement is over you hear a dial ton
180. he neutral and ground side of the receptacle The ground wire is green Verify the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 6 Setall media gateway power modules OFF Plug the AC power cable into the receptacle Connect Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Signals between the PN with the center stage switch for convenience called PN1 and the other PNs are carried by fiber optic cables Lightwave transceivers provide the required fiber optic interface The fiber optic cables from the center stage switch route to a Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU or fiber optic shelf Use multimode fiber transceivers and multimode fiber optic cables between media gateways unless single mode fiber is required distance restrictions Use metallic cables between carriers A CAUTION The PN with the center stage switch may contain a Class 1 LASER device if a single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote port network Make the required connections for the installation e Connect Fiber Optic Cables on page 73 e Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 73 e Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 74 e Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 75 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 73 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Fiber Optic Cables gt NOTE Always
181. he the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information Make sure you are plugged into the Services port 2 Eth1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address 192 11 13 6 Make sure you are using the correct login and password Make sure your browser is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information Make sure you are using the correct IP address 192 11 13 6 and port 5023 Make sure you are using the correct login and password IPSI LED has not been programmed with switch and location DHCP IPSI LED has not had an IP address assigned to it static IP addressing May 2002 Problem Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 299 Troubleshooting an Installation Solution Can t access IPSI for static addressing No V on IPSI LED V on IPSI LED is not filled in Make sure you are plugged into the Services top port Make sure the ARP cache is cleared In an MS DOS window type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter IPSI is not connected to Ethernet switch or network Connect cable to bottom port on IPSI faceplate and to the Ethernet switch PSI does not have an IP address assigned to it IPSI has not been administered Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files Problem Solution Can t get files from RFA site License file won t install Media server is in no l
182. hielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on each end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunks in collocated cabinets 100 foot 30 5 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 50 pin female connector on the other end Use this cable as an extension cable between the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack and other connector cables 50 foot 15 2 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a three inch 7 62 cm stub on the other end Use this cable to connect the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to channel multiplexers requiring hardwired connections Pinout of C6F Cable Pin Wire Color Lead Designation Number White Green LI High Side 47 Green LI 22 White Brown LO 48 Brown LO High Side 23 White Slate LBACK2 49 Slate LBACK1 24 May 2002 196 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only Connect a 25 pair cable from the AUX connector on the back of the expansion control carrier to a connecting block on the trunk auxiliary field Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector on page 197 shows the Control Carrier outputs cable pinouts The Control Carrier AUX connector outputs include Alarm monitoring for the auxiliary cabinet Seven 48 VDC power sources for emergency transfer units Three 48 VDC power sources for remotely powering three a
183. his source has 3 hot wires neutral wire and 1 ground wire e Non US Delta 4 wire 220 or 240 VAC This source has 3 hot wires and 1 ground wire AC Power Sources and Plug Type Power Distribution Unit Power Sources Power Input AC power distribution Single phase 120 VAC with 120 VAC 60 Hz J58890CE 1 and neutral NEMA 5 50R Is ce inedia Single phase 240 VAC with 208 240 VAC 60 gateway neutral or single phase of Hz NEMA 3 phase 208 VAC with L14 30R AC power distribution J58890CH 1 media gateway neutral Single phase 176 264 VAC 200 240 Volts 50 60 Hz NEMA L6 30R Installations outside the United States require a receptacle suitable for use in the country of installation gt NOTE The type of power required is shown on the media gateway s rear door Grounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE Grounding is relatively simple for an AC powered media gateway Basically the media gateways connect to the single point ground terminal block located at either the AC load center or to a separate single point ground block wired to the AC load center or optional AC protector media gateway The approved ground wire must be a green or green with yellow stripe 6 AWG 40 16 mm copper stranded wire e Bond all approved grounds at the single point ground to form a single grounding electrode system 1 Describes the power sources and required AC input power May 2002 52 Insta
184. i Connect 171 Connecting to the Customer s Network The TN2302AP IP Media Processor The TN2302AP IP Media Processor provides on interface between a customer s IP network and Avaya media gateways This interface is used to transport voice and FAX between the media gateways and IP devices such as H 323 V2 compliant endpoints and other Avaya telephone systems gt NOTE The P board suffix designation means the circuit pack is firmware downloadable Refer to Upgrading the Avaya 88700 Media Server Configurations Upgrade Selected Port Circuit Pack Firmware for more information For information on TN802 IP Trunking refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 7 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets IP Media Processor The following sections describe the process for e Preparing for the installation on page 171 Installing the TN2302AP IP Media Processor on page 173 For administration refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software Preparing for the installation In addition to the TN2302AP IP Media Processor you must also install and administer a C LAN circuit pack TN799DP For C LAN administration refer to Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software Each TN2302AP can support between 32 and 64 voice channels depending on the codecs used Check your onsite equipment Have the following equipment on site before y
185. ia Gateway 1 PN1 with 1 Switch Node Port Network 2 through 15 H600 278 Metallic Cable To other port networks Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 76 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between port slots 1 and 2 on each switch node is a metallic cable H600 278 Connect the 2 groups of 1 to 15 cables between PN1 and each of the other PNs in an alternating port slot order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth May 2002 75 76 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 9 9 Oo I NSSSSS Oo P SS LUU SS A SS Dee LUU NNN Ca F m na cs C O amp 39 a E an F EH a EC ramm H Ca F E Cc Ca p o E LD gt gt D D D D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 p U m E S E d LD QD D D D D 25 2 25 25 25 25 25 p m P SS cadferr KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway 1 PN1 with 1 Duplex Switch Node 2 Port Network 2 through 16 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable 4 To other Port Networks May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Conne
186. ication files on page 25 Verify media server 1 connection to customer s LAN on page 27 Test Media Server 1 LEDs on page 28 Configure SNMP traps on page 28 Verify date and time on page 29 Connect duplication cables on page 29 Configure Media Server 2 on page 29 Verify media server 2 connection to customer s LAN on page 31 Test media server 2 LEDs on page 32 Busy out standby media server on page 32 Customize the Active Media Server on page 36 Set up Avaya Site Administration Dedicated Services port on page 36 Set up Avaya Site Administration Active Media Server on page 37 Input translations on page 37 Reset Multi Vantage TM software on page 37 Add Media Gateways on page 38 Administer and Enable IPSI s on page 38 May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 21 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Configure Media Server 1 This section covers the following tasks e Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to Media Server 1 on page 25 e Install license and Avaya authentication files on page 25 The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to server 1 using the Web based administration application gt NOTE Make sure you have the complete list of IP addresses and names before starting thi
187. icense mode ASG doesn t work Can t place any calls Provided wrong SAP number Make sure there are not two license files on the server If so delete one of them Normal when license file is first installed because it cannot see the IPSIs they do not have IP addresses yet Re install Avaya authentication files Media server is in no license mode May 2002 300 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Troubleshooting an Installation May 2002 Index Installing the 8700 Multi Connect 301 Index Numerics 110A type terminal blocks SCC 123 110P type terminal blocks MCC 124 110P type terminal blocks frame mounting 160 110 type hardware 119 134 110 type hardware SCP 110 sneak current protection 127 110 type terminal blocks 123 110 type terminal blocks wall mounting 158 1110A2 apparatus mounting frame 160 1110C1 cable support 160 1145B power supply 226 227 231 1146B power distribution unit 231 234 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supply 236 238 1151A1 power supply 236 1151A2 power supply 236 1217A power supply 96 258A adapter 136 259A connector 173 26B1 selector console 203 204 2 wire digital station wiring 190 302D attendant console 203 356A adapter 136 3 pair and 4 pair modularity 199 3 pair modularity 154 3 pair to 4 pair station circuits 140 3 pair trunks cabling 130 451A extension adapter 138 4C3S 75 enhanced protector 212 4C3S 75 enhance
188. igh reliability systems cabling 104 I I O cables 162 information outlets wiring design 135 installation troubleshooting 297 installing Avaya Site Administration ASA 269 external ringing 224 IP Media Processor 173 telephone power supplies procedures 226 TN799DP C LAN 169 installing auxiliary cabinet 46 installing auxiliary cabinet equipment 46 installing cable slack manager 162 installing cables 128 installing cables between auxiliary cabinet and MDF 157 installing cables between cabinet and MDF 156 installing coupled bonding conductor wires 64 installing earthquake protection MCC 46 47 installing earthquake protection SCC 80 installing EPN cabinet 80 installing fiber optic cable 73 critical reliability CSS system 75 high reliability CSS system 74 standard reliability CSS system 73 installing patch cords and jumpers 150 installing PPN cabinet 45 80 installing sneak fuse panels 164 installing the MDF 123 installing trunk cables 130 integrated announcement testing 293 integration process connecting ITS to the network 173 inter cabinet cables 96 104 IP address set static 257 use DHCP 255 IP Media Processor administration 175 installing 173 test external connection to LAN 178 IP network connection testing 295 IPSI administer and enable 38 connect Ethernet cables 249 connect ribbon cables on SCC1 243 LEDs 277 program switch ID and cabinet 254 test connectivity 40 upgr
189. iguration cables will route through the cable slack manager as shown Complete cable routing is covered later in this chapter Cable clamps are required in installations with cable slack managers At the rear of the media gateways install 2 cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or MDF cables in place Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager MCC on page 162 and Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC on page 163 show cable clamp placement and cable routing Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager MCC cbdftlr CJL 102396 Figure notes 1 Topof Media Gateway 4 Spare Center Troughs 2 Cable Slack Manager 5 Media Gateway Trough for Port Cables 3 Cable Clamp May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC Figure notes a AB o N Top of Media Gateways Cable Clamps Cable Ties Optional Power Cord Cable Slack Manager 1758155 CJL 031496 Cable Slack Manager Cover Removed Main Distribution Frame MDF Route Cables Along Path Shown Po
190. in to administer the 58700 media server and the Avaya MultiVantage M software features You may also connect directly to an individual server using its name or IP address Avaya Site Administration To use Avaya Site Administration open the application and select the configuration you want to access When prompted log in to administer the Avaya MultiVantage M software features See Installing Avaya Site Administration on page 269 for information on installing Avaya Site Administration Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over the Network You can access the Avaya 88700 Media Server from any computer connected through the LAN To access either media server use the IP address assigned to the media server you want to access You can also use the active server address to connect automatically to the media server that is active Once connected you can administer the media server using three tools Media server web interface for media server specific administration and call processing features Avaya Site Administration for the MultiVantage software only available on the active media server Acommand line interface via a Telnet window for Linux shell commands Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem gt NOTE Remote access over a modem is for Avaya maintenance access only You can access the media server through an analog modem May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 269 Ac
191. inal block The 110A type terminal block that can be used is the 110AEI 75FT It must be field terminated to both the white and blue fields The 300 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are e IOPEI 300CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated on the blue field 110PE1 300FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are e IOPEI 900CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated on the blue field 110PE1 900FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields 451A Adapter Ordering Information Color Comcode Gray 103942272 Ivory 103786240 May 2002 138 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Wiring Design Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables crdfadi CJL 101596 Figure notes 1 Station Cable 4 258A Adapter 2 Information Outlet 5 4 Pair Station Cable 3 451A In Line Adapter 258A and BR2580A Adapters crdfadp CJL 101596 Figure notes 1 BR2580A Adapter 3 25 Pair Male Ribbon Connector 2 258A Adapter 4 4 Pair Modular Jacks 8 Pins May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Wiring Design 356A Adapter Figure notes 1 356A Adapter crdf356 CJL 101296 2 4 Pair Modular Jacks 6 pins each connected to 25 pair ribbon connector Adapter Ordering Information Description Comcode
192. ing capability is limited to incoming and outgoing calls only to pre administered numbers gt NOTE The init login no longer has the capability to change the customer options offer option or special applications forms e Access to Avaya MultiVantage software is restricted the switch does not provide normal call processing The Avaya authentication files enable Access Security Gateway ASG for the Avaya services logins on the switch ASG uses a challenge response protocol to confirm the validity of a user reducing the opportunity for unauthorized access Before starting the installation or ideally before coming on site the license and Avaya authentication files may be downloaded to the services laptop The license and Avaya authentication files are installed during the installation process gt NOTE To access the RFA application you must take the RFA online training and pass the online test RFA Information requirements for new installations You need the following information before going to the RFA web site e Your personal Single Sign On SSO for RFA web site authentication login SAP order number with right to use RTU features e Required customer information e Serial number of one of the TN2312AP IP server interface circuit packs this becomes the reference IPST e Access to the RFA Information page for these items if not already installed on your PC Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher installed on the ser
193. l a self sticking port label on the rear of each connector on the B25A connector cable See Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector on page 131 Labels should be positioned so they will not be obscured by the cabinet connector retainers At the rear of the Auxiliary cabinet connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector Route the cable down the rear of the cabinet and through the cable slack manager to the MDF At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block connector Store the excess cable in the cable slack manager Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector 1A2 gg m o Ibdf25p LJK 101596 May 2002 158 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall The 110A type terminal blocks can be stacked in almost any arrangement at any height or location on the wall One arrangement is shown in 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair on page 159 The distance between the mounting screw holes on the terminal blocks is 10 8 in 27 4 cm If a vertical patch cord trough is used the distance between the mounting screw holes is 5 31 in 13 3 cm With 110P type terminal blocks the first block of the trunk auxiliary field is aligned with the left side of the media gateway See 110P Type T
194. lack manager 134 cable installation control carrier outputs 129 cable routing guidelines 129 cable routing MDF 129 cable slack manager installing 162 cable slack manager space requirements 134 cable attendant console cabling distances 201 cable inter cabinet 96 cable TDM bus 96 cables 25 pair I O 134 162 connect Ethernet cables to IPSI 249 connect media server UPS Ethernet switch 242 fiber optic 72 inter cabinet 104 outputs for control carrier 196 cables installing 128 cables installing between auxiliary cabinet and MDF 157 cables installing between cabinet and MDF 156 cabling installing trunk cables 130 provisioning plan 118 cabling labels 128 cabling layout 148 Cajun P333T Ethernet switch LEDs 275 calling queue 225 carbon block protectors off premises connections 211 CE marks 4 check commercial power 72 checking circuit pack configuration 284 checking system status 283 circuit pack configuration testing 284 circuit pack damage or discrepancies 45 79 circuit pack LEDs 272 circuit packs DS1 converter LEDs 281 duplication interface LEDs 281 LEDs 280 C LAN administration 175 test external connection to LAN 178 with IP Media Processor 171 C LAN connection testing 295 closets site locations 135 CO trunk wiring 190 collocated DS1 tie trunks wiring 193 concentrator cables connecting trunk pairs 153 concrete floor mounting 47 80 conductor coupled bonding 133 configu
195. ld be rounded down and a partial number of 0 5 or more should be rounded up for example 2 4 2 Cable Slack Managers and 2 5 3 Cable Slack Managers gt NOTE Cable clamps are required in installations with Cable Slack Managers At the rear of the media gateways on each rear ground plate install two cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or Main Distribution Frame MDF cables in place May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 135 Station Wiring Design Station Wiring Design The following hardware and cabling is used e Information Outlets on page 135 modular wall jacks e Station Cables on page 135 e Closets on page 136 Site locations Satellite locations A brief description of each of the above listed items follows Ordering information is not provided for station cables and information outlets Information Outlets Information outlets are 8 pin modular wall jacks Most of the outlets are wired with push on connections Information outlets are also available that connect to a double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable routed from the MDF a site satellite location or an adapter Station Cables For clarity a station cable is either a 25 pair cable multiple 25 pair cable or 4 pair D inside wire DIW run from the equipment room site satellite location or adapter to the information outlets The following station cables are avail
196. le port circuit on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration for each telephone trunk and peripheral connection needed and any auxiliary power for Basic Rate Interface BRI and certain display sets The Port Assignment Record must have this information Station or trunk type or feature service Building location floor room desk outlet Extension number or trunk group and member number Port circuit location on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration for each endpoint media gateway carrier slot circuit Route from equipment room through equipment closets to each endpoint Auxiliary power supply if required May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 119 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware SYSTIMAX 110 type hardware is used for the Main Distribution Frame MDF 110 type hardware is available in two basic types the 110A and 110P The 110A requires less wall space than the 110P The 110P includes horizontal and vertical cable troughs for managing cross connect cables The S8700 Multi Connect configuration is connected to the MDF with the supplied B25A male to female 25 pair cables The cables are provided in 10 foot 3 m and 15 foot 4 5 m lengths Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 for more information Example MDF Connections Avaya SCC Media Gateway on page 120 shows a detailed example of the SCC1 media gatewa
197. lling the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway 1 Atthe bottom rear of the first media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block See Typical Media Gateway Ground Location on page 53 2 Routethe media gateway GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load center and connect 3 Atthe bottom rear of the next media gateway if provided connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block 4 Routethe media gateway GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load center and connect gt NOTE If the media gateway is located remotely in a separate room or building connect the media gateway GROUND wire to an approved ground 5 Repeat connecting each media gateway to the single point ground block 6 Atthe AC load center connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to the single point ground block This ground wire will later be tie wrapped to the trunk cables and connected to the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC ground block at the MDF The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC wires are installed and terminated in Cabling Port Networks on page 116 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 53 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Media Gateway Ground Location
198. logy Equipment CISPR 22 1997 and EN55022 1998 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement CISPR 24 1997 and EN55024 1998 including Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 61000 4 2 Radiated Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000 4 4 Lightning Effects IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000 4 8 Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000 4 11 Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000 3 2 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000 3 3 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable pro tection against harmful interference when the equipment is oper ated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interfer ence in which case the user will be required to correct the inter ference at his own expense Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervi sion signaling is
199. loor anchor See Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor on page 49 Measure the distance from 1 of the anchors to the bottom of the media gateway Add 1 2 in 1 3 cm to this measurement to allow the rod to be threaded into the floor anchor Add an additional 1 2 in 1 3 cm to allow the rod to protrude up through the bottom of the media gateway For example if the distance from the floor anchor to the bottom of the media gateway is 10 in 25 cm cut the threaded rod 11 in 27 9 cm long When all 4 threaded rods are cut replace the raised floor panels removed in Step 5 Position the media gateway over the holes and adjust the leveling legs until the media gateway is level gt NOTE 11 12 13 If the S8700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork the media gateways must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 in 0 3 cm Insert the threaded rods through the media gateway bottom and thread into the concrete floor anchors Place a 3 8 in flat washer onto each rod Thread a 3 8 16 hex nut onto each rod and tighten securely Repeat this procedure for each media gateway to be installed including the auxiliary cabinet if required May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 49 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor 3 8 inch flat washer
200. lti Connect configuration Voice and Data Terminals Type Multi button Electronic Telephone MET sets Voice 10 20 30 Button Analog Analog voice 500 2500 2554 2500 DMGC 2500YMGK S203A Speakerphone 71XXX series Analog voice 7101A 7102A 7103A 7104A 73XXX series Hybrid voice 7302H 7303H 7303S 7305S 7305H 74XXD series Digital voice 7401D 7403D 7404D 7405D 7406D 7407D 7410D 7434D 7444 81XX series Analog voice 8102 8110 91 XX series 9101 9103 9110 84XX series Digital voice 8403B 8405B D B D 8410B D 8411B D 8412 8434 8435 94XX series 9403 9410 9434 Basic Rate Interface BRI 75XX series BRI voice 7505 VOM T 7506 VOM T 7507 VOM T 85XX series 8503 8510 8520 Workstation series Business Communications Terminals BCTs and Data Business Communications Systems BCS 510D BCT 513 BCT 515 BCT 615 BCT 715 BCT 715 BCS PC PBX platform digital PC ISDN platform BRI Consoles Data and 301A Attendant Console 302A1 Enhanced Generic 1 Console voice 602A1 ACD Console CallMaster amp digital communications terminal May 2002 146 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Voice and Data Terminals Voice and Data Terminals Type ZE01A Expansion Module for 8434Dx Voice and Features Cordless Hybrid Voice MDW 9000 TransTalk 9000 MDC 9000 DCP Data interface Data and Constellation Automatic Call Distribution ACD data terminal voice PassageWay interface Da
201. m gt NOTE If more than 200 ft 61 m of 4 pair station cable is required a 451A in line adapter double ended modular female connector is attached to the cable and a second 4 pair cable of the required length is plugged into the adapter See Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables Double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable to provide nonstandard length runs between adapters and information outlets with push on connections It can also be used between adapters and modularly connected information outlets It is available in the same lengths as the single modular plug ended cable Bulk Cable Same as the 25 pair cable or multiple 25 pair cable however the bulk cable is not equipped with connectors Use this cable between the equipment room and satellite closets when both are equipped with punch down type terminal connecting blocks 4 pair station cable Use this cable when 4 pair station cables are to be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and the information outlets require push on connections Closets Site Locations Site locations are closets that provide a point in the station wiring for the administration of remote powering Adapters are used at site locations to terminate the 25 pair station cables and provide connection points modular jacks for power adapters and 4 pair station cables The258A and BR2580A adapters plug into a 25 pair
202. minal transmitRRing B Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 200 is from the port circuit pack to the voice or data terminal Most terminals connect to an information outlet modular jack installed at the work location Make the connections from the port circuit pack to the modular jacks as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 200 Then plug the terminal into the modular jack Adjunct Power Connection Locations on page 200 shows three methods of connecting adjunct power May 2002 200 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity 9 9 26 1 1 je E 1 2 2 a 2 2 27 3 3 e 3 9 2 4 4 g 4 28 5 5 5 NE 5 Q 3 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 widf3pm PDH 011397 Figure notes 1 Port Circuit Pack 5 Adjunct Power 2 Media Gateway Connector Pins 6 Output From Information Outlet 3 Pair Modularity 4 Pair Modularity 3 Main Distribution Frame MDF Pins 7 Voice or Data Terminal Pins 3 Pair Modularity 4 Inputto Information Outlet 4 Pair Modularity Return to Task List Adjunct Power Connection Locations Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 201 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power Adjunct power for station equipment may be supplied from the equipment room satellite location or the work location For
203. nd 2 3 fingered end of the concentrator cables to the appropriate carrier slots Equipped carrier slots are identified on the CSD Mark the nomenclature strips above the carriers to identify the slots Label connectors on each end of the cables that connect to the media gateway Route the cables down the sides of the media gateway and store the excess cable slack in the cable slack manager as previously described May 2002 154 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables Q 9 i le NN edel gt do dol K gt Q 9 3 4 NEW796 THC 031296 Figure notes 1 Trunk Auxiliary Field 6 Alternate Block Rows 2 To Expansion Control Carrier AUX 7 RJ2IX RJ2GX Network Interface ronnie 8 Sneak Fuse Panel 3 Cable WP90929 List 9 B25A Cable 4 Concentrator Cable WP90929 List T8 Conti Caio daamks 3 11 Media Gateway 5 A25D Male to Male Cable Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks on page 155 and 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks on page 156 show trunk pairs connected to the media gateway with jumper wires to establish 3 pair modularity May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 155 Patch Cord Jumper Installation an
204. nectors indicates a short circuit in the building wiring or the terminal equipment To reset the LED 1 Disconnect the terminal equipment from the wall jack 2 If the LED goes off the terminal equipment is faulty and must be replaced If the LED is still lit find and repair the short circuit in the building wiring 3 Reconnectthe terminal equipment to the wall jack and re test terminal equipment operation 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supplies comply with the UL Standard UL 1950 second edition Complies UL 1950 Certified CSA 22 2 Approved EN6950 Approved CE For safety instructions see Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies on page 236 For installation instructions see Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies on page 238 gt NOTE The 1151B1 and 1151B2 power supplies replace the 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supplies and will be available in Summer 2002 Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When using this power supply the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this power supply This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibilit
205. neral rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable code at the installation site gt NOTE Before connecting the media gateways to the approved ground determine the best method of grounding See Approved Grounds for more information Also locate the approved ground as close to the media gateways as possible gt NOTE The ground plates and cabinet clips are installed later in this procedure Task List Connect Ground to DC power cabinet e Connect Ground for DC power cabinet on page 83 e Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground on page 85 e Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground on page 86 Connect Ground for DC power cabinet 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 1 AWG 70 7 mm ground wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar See Grounding for DC power cabinet on page 84 2 Route the ground wire out of the cabinet and terminate it on the approved ground A CAUTION The approved ground must be connected using the correct gauge wire terminated with a listed clamp and identified with a grounding tag FORM 15657NR or equivalent May 2002 84 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Grounding for DC power cabinet dc rect RBP 051396 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 DC power cabinet To Approved Ground 1 AWG 70 7 mm Wire G
206. nes on page 214 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples on page 215 Install External Ringing on page 224 Install the Queue Warning Indicator on page 225 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies on page 226 Refer to the Job Aid entitled Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts for information on pinouts May 2002 Connect Telephones Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 187 Installing and Wiring Telephones Various analog digital and IP telephones can be connected to the media gateway These telephones include e Connectable Telephones and Consoles on page 187 e Connecting a Typical Telephone on page 188 e Connect Adjunct Power on page 189 e Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station on page 190 Connectable Telephones and Consoles The following telephones and consoles can connect to any Avaya media gateway Connectable Telephone and Consoles Telephone and Console Models Type 500 554 rotary dial 500 DMGC Analog 2500 2554 2500YMGK 3127 Avaya Soundstation Analog 3127 STD EXP APE APX 3127 Avaya Soundstation Digital 3127 DCS DDP DDX DPE DPX MIC PMI 46xx series 4602 4606 4612 4620 4624 4630 62xx series 6210 6211 6218 6219 6220 6221 64xx series 6402 D 6408D 6416D D M 6424D D M 71xxx series 7101A 7102A 7103A 7104A 81xx series 8101 M 8102 M 8
207. networks Reset MultiVantage TM software gt NOTE Do not reset the Multi Vantage software if no translations were input The following administration is done on a computer used to access the Avaya 8700 Media Server using Avaya Site Administration 1 If not already open launch Avaya Site Administration 2 Loginto media server 1 the active server as craft 3 Establish a SAT Emulation session 4 Type reset system 4 and press Enter to get Avaya MultiVantage TM software to read the copied translations May 2002 38 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack Add Media Gateways gt NOTE Do this procedure only if the translations were not input earlier The following administration is done on a computer used to access the Avaya 858700 Media Server using Avaya Site Administration 1 2 Type add cabinet number 2 through 44 and press Enter for each equipped Media Gateway Fill in the equipped carrier types for the Media Gateway Administer and Enable IPSI s CAUTION 1 The following procedure must be executed on all configurations This includes configurations that are translated using a bulk provisioning tool such as Avaya Site Administration or ProVision When Avaya MultiVantage software is first initialized it does not know the primary and secondary control subnet addresses Submitting the following form will cause the Avaya MultiVantage software to read this
208. ng States DS1 Converter Yellow LED Flashing States LED on LED off Condition 0 1 second 0 1 second Fiber out of frame or fiber loss of signal 0 5 second 0 5 second In frame fiber channel down The fiber channel communicating between 1 second the DS1 Converter and the other fiber endpoint EI or SNI is down 1 second In frame control channel down The control channel between the 2 DSI Converters in the DS1 Converter complex is down 2 seconds 0 2 second No response from the media server The media server is not acknowledging solid on messages from the DS1 Converter or the communications link to the media server is down DS1 Converter active This is the normal state for an active DS1 Converter solid off DS1 Converter standby This is the normal state for a standby DS1 Converter in critical reliability configurations duplicated PNC May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 283 Testing the Complete Configuration SPAN LEDs The 4 SPAN LEDs indicate the status of the 4 T1 E1 facilities A SPAN LED is in one of the following states e Solid on yellow Facility is operational and alarm free e Blinking yellow for 2 seconds off 0 1 seconds Facility is operational and alarm free AND is carrying the control channel facility A or B only e Solid on red Facility is alarmed e Solid off Facility is not administered or has been busied out Testing Port Network Equipment Check Port Network Sta
209. ng the TN2302AP IP Media Processor circuit packs From the rear of the media gateway 2 Connectthe amphenol connector on the adapter to the Amphenol connector corresponding to each TN2302AP slot Connect the Ethernet 1 Connect the network cable s to the ETHERNET connector on the TN2302AP backplane adapter s gt NOTE You need a CATS or better cable for 100 Mbyte operation May 2002 174 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Install the circuit packs A CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap gt NOTE The TN799DP and TN2302AP circuit packs are hot swappable so you do not need to power down the media gateway to install them gt NOTE To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged Use Avaya Site Administration for the administration 1 Insert the TN799DP circuit pack into the port slot identified earlier 2 Insert the TN2302AP IP Media Processor into the port slot you reserved for it and seat it properly See TN2302AP IP Interface faceplate on page 175 When you plug in the TN2302AP IP Media Processor the circuit pack starts to boot The RED LED stays on until an IP address is assigned to the circuit pack 3 Loginas craft 4 Ty
210. nk 190 digital tie trunk 192 DS1 tie trunks 193 off premises stations 209 procedures 186 telephone connection 188 wiring telephone power supplies procedures 226 Z ZD8AJ adapter 136 May 2002 308 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect Index May 2002
211. nnection method Use IP address 192 11 13 6 Use port 5023 7 When the switch record is established test by connecting to the media server May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 37 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Set up Avaya Site Administration Active Media Server The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to the non dedicated network customer LAN The ASA switch record to connect to the active media server will be unique for each customer gt NOTE Ata minimum Avaya Site Administration 1 11 should be used to work properly with the Avaya 8700 media server and the Avaya Multi Vantage software Plug the services laptop into a port on the customer s LAN On the laptop launch Avaya Site Administration Click on File Click on New Click on Switch o a F WO N Follow the Add Switch wizard to build a configuration record for the current customer Give the switch record a unique name Select Network Connection as the connection method Use the active server IP address Use port 5023 7 When the switch record is established connect the laptop to the customer s LAN and test by connecting to the active media server Input translations Contact the installation personnel responsible for translation input to download translations If the translations are not ready you may continue with the process entering minimal translations to verify connectivity to the port
212. nt ground plate with the holes at the top of the lower media gateway Insert the four supplied 12 24 x 1 2 inch 1 27 cm thread forming screws Do not tighten the screws yet 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all stacked media gateways are fastened together 4 Tighten all screws securely Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View grdpltec LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 Front Ground Plate or Media Gateway Clip 2 Battery 3 Rear Ground Plate May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 103 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection A media gateway clip is required between each pair of stacked media gateways At the front of the media gateways install a media gateway clip between each pair of media gateways by hooking the clip into the slot of the upper media gateway and snapping the straight leg of the clip into the slot on the lower media gateway See Location of Media Gateway Clips on page 103 Location of Media Gateway Clips So zz AL I T LL LILLE LEE Il ZZ A LE zz 22 ZA 2 ZZ T Ze LEE JA zz VLE Ze LE A LEE LE LE Ze Z Z ZA LYLE BZ Zi LLG VL LL zz A LEE LL LE 22 A gh LESS LEE LEE E22 Le Za Zp j f GA Zs 27 LE zz e scdfep2 KLC 101596 1 Expansion Control Media Gateway A
213. ntrol Media Gateway A No ground plate is installed on an un stacked media gateway Rear Ground Plate attached between stacked media gateways Port Media Gateway B Screws to Loosen May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 101 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View grdpltec LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 Front Ground Plate or Media Gateway Clip 2 Battery 3 Rear Ground Plate Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection Ground plates are installed between stacked media gateways provide the ground connection between media gateways provide radio frequency RF radiation protection and help stabilize the media gateways May 2002 102 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Use the front ground plate instead of the media gateway clip to attach the media gateways to each other Use one front ground plate between two stacked media gateways 1 At the front of the media gateways align the holes in the top of the front ground plate with the holes at the bottom of the upper media gateway and insert the four screws Do not tighten the screws yet See Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View on page 101 2 Atthefront of the media gateways align the holes in the bottom of the fro
214. ntrusion should occur it could result in a variety of losses to your company including but not limited to human data pri vacy intellectual property material assets financial resources labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its net worked equipment rests with you Avaya s customer system adminis trator your telecommunications peers and your managers Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to Installation documents System administration documents Security documents Hardware software based security tools Shared information between you and your peers Telecommunications security experts To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment you and your peers should carefully program and configure Your Avaya provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces Your Avaya provided software applications as well as their underlying hardware software platforms and interfaces Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products Voice Over Internet Protcal VoIP If the equipment supports Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP facili ties you may experience certain compromises in performance reli ability and security even when the equipment performs as warranted These compromises may become more acut
215. o report the alarm to INADS the LED flashes this signals the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm Terminal Alarm Notification Terminal Alarm Notification is an optional feature that displays several types of alarms on telephones with administered feature buttons or the attendant console A maximum of 10 digital and or hybrid telephones may be used When an alarm occurs the green status LED associated with the assigned button is in a steady state The LED may be turned off by pressing the button associated with the LED If the LED is off and the alarm has not been resolved by the time maintenance reschedules testing the green status LED resumes its steady state IP Server Interface LEDs The TN2312AP IP Server Interface IPSI circuit pack LEDs are shown in TN23124AP circuit pack faceplate It also has a programmable LED display to indicate whether its IP address is dynamic shows media gateway location or static shows I P See LED display on the IPSI circuit pack static address May 2002 278 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration TN23124AP circuit pack faceplate Figure notes a AB o N Slot for ribbon cable not used LED display Red LED Green LED Amber LED 6 7 8 9 A20Z4mz mo zmo ckdlipsi LIK 022402 Recessed programming button Yellow LED
216. on button labels Required for network access to the Avaya 88700 Media Server AUDIX and other network connected systems One free serial port capable of 9600 bps operation is required for a connection to each serial device UPS We recommend that PCs have at least a 16550A UART or 16550A UART simulator capable of 56 kbps DTE speed connections USB and internal modems should emulate this hardware A second serial port is required for simultaneous connection to AUDIX through a serial connection May 2002 270 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server You can install ASA on your computer two different ways from the Avaya Site Administration CD or from the 8700 Media Server From the ASA CD Place the ASA CD in the CD ROM drive and follow the installation instructions in the install wizard From the S8700 Media Server 1 Connect to one of the media servers either directly or through the network from the computer you want ASA to be installed on 2 Access the media server web interface by typing in the Location Address field 192 11 13 6 direct connect or the IP address or the domain name of the media server over the network 3 Loginand get to the main menu 4 Click on Download ASA to download Avaya Site Administration to your computer 5 Follow the installation instructions in the install wizard To start ASA click on Start Programs Avaya Site Administration ASA supports
217. ondition requires action but its consequences are not immediate Problems might be impaired service to a few trunks or stations or interfering with one feature across the entire configuration Warning Alarms Failures that cause no significant degradation of service or failures in equipment external to the configuration Warning alarms are not reported to the attendant console or INADS Alarms are communicated to users and technicians by entries in the alarm and sys logs and the lighting of LEDs located on the attendant console on all circuit packs and optionally on customer designated telephones More detailed information is available here for S8700 Media Server LEDs Cajun Ethernet Switch LEDs UPS LEDs Attendant Console LEDs Terminal Alarm Notification Circuit Pack LEDs DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs SPAN LEDs IP Server Interface LEDs S8700 Media Server LEDs The media server has the LEDs shown in LEDs on front and back of media server May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 273 Testing the Complete Configuration LEDs on front and back of media server 026 0809 o9d ogo 09699 ogo o9o9g ogo 09699 ogo 080 ogo 09699 ogo o969g 026 olod 026 o808q ogo 09699 026 09699 ogo 09699 ogo 09699 ogo 09699 o96 o9 9d o fo o ogo ogo ogo ogo ogo 686 o o fo o ogo ogo o
218. one on a computer used to access the Avaya S8700 Media Server using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface Click View Current Alarms to view any alarms View Current Alarms Product ID 1006811000 alrmsummary 4 Unable to connect to Avaya Call Processing almdisplay 4 Unable to connect to Avaya Call Processing Clear Clear All About This Screen Resolve all alarms not involving the busied out standby media server Refer to Maintaining the 58700 Media Server document to resolve alarms May 2002 264 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Completing the Installation Administration Back up the media server The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the 58700 Media Server Web Interface 1 Place the PCMCIA flashcard into the bottom slot of the PCMCIA drive in the active media server hidlopt LJK 030102 Figure notes 1 Media Server 2 PCMCIA flashcard Bottom slot of PCMCIA drive 2 Click Backup Now and select all applicable data sets Select Save ACP translations prior to backup to save translations to the media server s internal disk drive before backing up the data gt NOTE Customer s may want to back up using another method May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 265 Completing the Installation Administration B
219. onnect 143 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 3 Pair to 4 Pair Satellite Location Connectivity Figure notes o0 A OQ N N Part of MDF 3 Pair Connecting Blocks Purple Field White Field 9 Y Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers To Media Gateway 3 Pair Modularity A25D Cable 3 Pair Circuits B25A Cable 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 lo e E Connectorized staggered finger Multiple 25 Pair Cable 4 Pair Connecting Blocks Blue Field 258A or BR2580A Adapter Information Outlet 4 Pair Circuit DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire Part of Satellite Location 4 Pair Circuits B25A Cable May 2002 144 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 3 Pair to 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity Figure notes 1 o a F W N Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF 3 Pair Connecting Blocks Purple Field Blue Field Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers To Media Gateway 3 Pair Modularity 10 11 12 t AKAKAA 1758533a CJL 031196 B25A Cable 3 Pair Circuits 356A Adapter Information Outlet 3 Pair Circuit in 4 Pair Wire DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 145 Voice and Data Terminals Voice and Data Terminals e Administration Terminals on page 147 These voice and data terminals can connect to the 8700 Mu
220. onnect configuration initialization aftermarket additions and continuing maintenance You can access the Avaya S8700 Media Server in one of three ways directly remotely over the customer s local area network LAN or over a modem A direct connection and over the customer s LAN are the preferred methods Remote access over a modem is for Avaya maintenance access only This section covers the following tasks Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly e Accessing the Avaya 88700 Media Server Remotely over the Network e Accessing the Avaya 88700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly You access the Avaya S8700 Media Server directly by plugging a computer into the services access port which defaults to port 2 Eth1 on the back of the media server See Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server on page 267 You must use a crossover cable with an RJ45 connector on each end Plug the other end into the network connector NIC card on the your computer You may need a network interface card NIC adapter May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server o9o 6 9995990 2626999595260 30309020308080 cadlsrvr KLC 030
221. onnectors on each end Typically for an IP Connect configuration you connect through port 1 EthO See CAT5 cable connected to a port on the back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server on page 168 Fora Multi Connect configuration you connect through one of the available 4 ports on the NIC card typically the one corresponding to Eth4 The other end of the cable connects to an Ethernet switch router hub or token ring CAT5 cable connected to a port on the back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server 0000000000000000 o 00000000000000000 oo oo 00000000000000000 000000 0000 OO oo 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 Oo ca OOO00000000000000000000000000000000000 i 7 oo OO00000000000000000000000000000000000 5 3 Oo OO00000000000000000000000000000000000 oo oo 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 oo o 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 oO O000000000000000000000000000000000000 E 0000000000 z s O 22999999998 o AN P ES p 9002027 oog OOO000000000 i mB Py is oo OOOO0O000000 4 K oog 9090909000090 oO PRO IX S 00000 OOO 0000 000000 OO000000000 O 00000 660000000 00000000 e 9000000000 Nee cadinetw KLC 031802 a aiti i Figure notes 1 To network May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 169 Connecting
222. ot 1 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack for example port 3 4 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the 2 wire digital station to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack 5 Administer using Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 191 Installing and Wiring Telephones 2500 Type Analog Telephone Wiring Figure notes 9 9 T 24 4d 28 T3 R34 4 03 R3 2500wire RBP 071996 1 2500 Type Analog Station 2 TN2183 Analog Line Circuit Pack Position 1C01 Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T BRI with Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 1 TXT 2 TXR T 3 PXT TXT R 4 T PXR T 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection 4 pin 7 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC modular 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD jack GRD Circuit TN754 TN2181 TN556 TN2183 TN2198 Pack 4 wire 2 wire digital ISDN BRI Analog line 2 wire Basic digital 8 16 port Line 16 port Rate Interface port TN2224 line 2 wire digital 24 port PX PBX transmitT Tip A TX Terminal transmitRRing B May 2002 192 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Analog Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect analog tie trunk wiring from one Avaya 8700 Media Server for IP Connect Configurations to
223. ound block May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 63 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram widfspgb KLC 100297 Figure notes 1 O ON Oo oO F WO I First Media Gateway Additional Media Gateways if installed 6 AWG 40 16 mm2 Media Gateway GROUND Wire Single Point Ground Block 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm2 Ground Wire Wire to Approved Ground AC Load Center Single Point Ground Over 50 ft 15 2 m Media Gateway Ground Terminal Block May 2002 64 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires This is a conductor that connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated cable The mutual coupling between the CBC and the pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment The conductor consists of a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire terminated at the CBC ground terminal bar at the Main Distribution Frame MDF 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 60 2 Routethe 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the CBC ground terminal bar at the MDF Be sure a minimum of 12 in 30 5 cm spacing is maintained between the CBC and other power and ground leads 3 Tie wrap the ground wire to the insi
224. ound for Media Gateway dc rect4 RBP 032896 Figure notes 1 6 AWG 40 4 mm2 Wire Expansion Control Media Gateway A Single Point Ground Block 2 3 4 To Additional Expansion Control Media Gateways in Same Room 5 DC Power Cabinet 6 Ground Discharge Bar Connect DC Power Use the procedures in the following task list to connect DC power Task List Connect the DC power e Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet on page 91 e Connect Battery Cabinet on page 92 e Connect Optional Battery Leads on page 93 May 2002 87 88 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Making DC Power Connections A 30 foot 9 m cable connects to each cabinet A special connector on one end of the cable is plugged into the cabinet power connector The cable must be cut to length and terminated inside the J58890R DC power cabinet Each rectifier assembly can supply up to 50 amps of DC current A minimum of two rectifiers are installed in each DC power cabinet to supply a total of 100 amps A third rectifier assembly can be installed and is used as a backup N41 Each cabinet can pull up to 18 amps Up to 3 DC power cabinets can be stacked to supply power to media gateway stacks Typical DC Power Connections on page 89 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power system without a J58890CG DC Power
225. our shipment arrives e An unoccupied port slot in the media gateway for each TN2302AP IP Media Processor gt NOTE The TN2302AP consumes 16 W of power per slot compared with an average of 15 W per slot Do not fill every available slot in a given media gateway with them e Anunoccupied port slot for the TN799DP A 10 BaseT or 10 100 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network LAN for the TN2302AP May 2002 172 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network A 10 BaseT Ethernet connection into your LAN for the TN799DP Two or more valid unused IP addresses on the network one for each TN2302AP and one for each C LAN that can be assigned to the IP Media Processor server You also need the subnet mask and default gateway gt NOTE Get this information from the network administrator or refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet S amp 700 IP Connect or Pre Installation Network Worksheet 8S6700 Multi Connect Check your shipment When the order arrives at your site check the contents see Required Hardware on page 172 1 Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it If the box is damaged do not open it Inform the shipping company and ask for instructions on filing a claim 2 If the box is undamaged check the contents against the packing slip Check the condition of each component and note any damage or shortages on
226. ower Distribution Unit Wire endpoints to the 1146B2 while power from the 1145B2 is on A red LED lights if its associated circuit is connected to shorted wiring or to a shorted telephone 1 Install cross connect jumpers to wire from the unit the label shows polarity to Pins 7 and 8 of the appropriate information outlet Route the wires through the clip provided on the unit If a red LED is on see Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit on page 236 See Typical Wiring to a Telephone on page 235 Mark lead destinations on the label next to each connector Also mark the Unit Number and Connectivity information on the label May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Typical Wiring to a Telephone Figure notes oN O oO 5 WO NM Power Supply Kit 2 5 5 0 or 8 0 Amp Hour Battery 1146B2 Distribution Unit 1145B2 Power Supply Circuits 1 16 Circuits 17 32 Port Circuit 23 9 Ja CE 9 Modular Cord 10 Pins 7 and 8 Display Terminal Power 11 AC Input 12 Installer Provided Ground Wire 13 ISDN Display System Protocol Terminal 14 Circuits 1 32 Main Distribution Frame May 2002 235 236 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit A red LED next to any of the 32 power output con
227. ower over Ethernet ports gt NOTE Please refer to the P333T PWR User s Guide for more information May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 241 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Connect the Cables Connect IP Telephones PCs servers routers workstations and hubs 1 Connect the Ethernet connection cable not supplied to a 10 100 Mbps port on the front panel of the Avaya P333T PWR gt NOTE You should use standard RJ 45 connections You must use CAT 5 cable for 100 Mbps operation 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port of the PC server router workstation IP phone switch or hub gt NOTE Use a cross cable when connecting the Avaya P333T PWR to a switch or hub 3 Check that the appropriate link LNK LEDs light up Using the P333T PWR The P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch can be used to power 46xx series IP telephones in addition to providing a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection The switch can form part of a stack with the G700 Media Gateway or members of the P330 stackable switching system CAUTION The Avaya P333T PWR does not contain any user serviceable components inside Do not open the case CAUTION The P333T PWR can be used only indoors and in a controlled environment The P333T PWR has 24 10 100Base T ports each of which can supply up to 16 5W using the internal power supply and operates on a 100 240 VAC 5 3A 50 60 Hz power source with t
228. own power to the UPS loads via SNMP message Refer to the configuration section of the user guide that comes with the UPS for the default user ID and password and the administration commands Use the following general procedures to administer the UPSs gt NOTE These steps are specifically for the Powerware 9125 UPS equipped with a ConnectUPS MX SNMP module These steps use the default addresses and subnet masks for the 58700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration If other addresses are to be used they must be substituted when performing these steps Refer to the Pre Installation Network Worksheet S8700 Multi Connect for the proper data 1 Connectthe services laptop computer RS 232 serial port to the DB 9 connector on the back of the ConnectUPS MX module for UPS A Use a DB 9 to DB 9 serial cable Supplied with the ConnectUPS TM MX SNMP Module 2 Open a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal on the services laptop May 2002 34 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack 3 Administer the emulation program port settings e 9600 baud rate No parity e 8 bits 1 stop bit 4 Press Enter The Main Configuration screen appears If the Main Configuration screen does not appear Press Enter again 5 Type BR 0 and press Enter Sets the BOOTP retry counter to zero 6 TypeIP 198 152 254 239 and press Enter Default IP Address for this UPS 7 Type NM 255 255 255 0 and press Enter Defa
229. pe list configuration all and press Enter to verify that the Multi Vantage software recognizes the TN2302AP circuit packs May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network TN2302AP IP Interface faceplate Initial Administration Steps for C LAN and IP Media Processor gt NOTE Refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for specific information 1 Type change node names and press Enter 2 On page 2 type in the node names and IP addresses for the TN799DP and the TN2302AP gt NOTE The customer or design team provides the actual name and address Suggest a generic name and not one tied to the circuit pack May 2002 175 176 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network dm node names ip Page l of p IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address cognac A 19 2 default Qa rU 1x0 medpro 92 168 82 prowler 92 168 83 prowlerl 72 16 9 2221 prowler2 72 16 9 222 prowler3 72 16 9 223 prowler4 225356 9 224 prowler5 72 16 Ome Oo sriclanl 92 168 80 sriclan2 72 16 9 4220 traf clan 72 16 9 118 12 of 12 administered node names were displayed EK list node names command to see all the administered node names P 3 Type display circuit pack and press Enter Verify that the TN2302AP shows up in the Code column 4 Type change ip interfaces and press En
230. pleted WEB Click View IPSI Version and select Query AII to verify that all IPSI circuit packs have the required IPSI firmware version Upgrade Cajun Ethernet Switch Firmware if necessary Refer to Upgrading the Avaya 8700 Media Server Configurations Upgrade Cajun Ethernet Switch Firmware for the information Verify translations The following administration is done on a computer used to access the Avaya 858700 Media Server using SAT Emulation on ASA 1 Type list configuration all and press Enter to view all the administered circuit packs in the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Type list ipserver interface and press Enter to verify the location of the IPSI circuit packs Check the administration status on the following items list station list trunk group list hunt group list vdns Enable and Disable Ethernet Switch Ports The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to the Avaya S8700 Media Server using the 8700 Media Server Web Interface May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 263 Completing the Installation Administration Click Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports to enable the Ethernet ports being used and to disable the unused Ethernet ports Ethernet Switch Port Administration Select a Switch to Administer Control Network A Switch 1 C Control Network B Switch 1 Submit About This Screen View alarms The following administration is d
231. r IP address to Ping Select the following options Do not look up symbolic names for host addresses Bypass normal routing tables and send directly to a host Execute Ping About This Screen 3 Have the customer enter a name if DNS is administered or IP address 4 Verify that the ping executes successfully and a response is returned from the target host May 2002 28 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack The following test is done from a customer desktop PC connected to the corporate LAN 1 Opena DOS command window Start Run Command 2 Ping the Active Server name if DNS is administered or IP address 3 Verify that the ping executes successfully and a response is returned from the active Media Server 4 PingServer 1 name if DNS is administered or IP address 5 Verify that the ping executes successfully and a response is returned from server 1 Test Media Server 1 LEDs The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 using the S8700 Media Server Web Interface 1 Click Test Server LEDs to test the media server LEDs 2 Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the media server front of media server and the transmit LED on the duplication card back of media server to ensure they are blinking Configure SNMP traps The following administration is done on the computer used to access the Avaya S8700 Media Server using the 5
232. r TILTWATCH indicators on the container If the container has been shaken or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating potential damage Report any damage according to local shipping instructions Ay DANGER Take care to avoid injury while cutting and removing the 2 metal bands 2 Unpack the cabinet and remove all packing material 3 Move the cabinet into its proper position 4 Remove the lower rear panel from the auxiliary cabinet gt NOTE You reinstall the lower rear panel when the installation is completed May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 45 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Check Circuit Packs 1 Ensure all circuit packs are fully inserted into the proper slots according to the System Diagram shipped with the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Report any discrepancies in circuit pack type or quantity to your Avaya representative For detailed circuit pack descriptions refer to Designing the Avaya 8700 Media Gateway for Multi Connect Configuration 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions Correct Shipping Errors 1 Red tag all defective and over shipped equipment and return to the nearest Material Stocking Location MSL 2 Tocontactthe Avaya Order Exception group in the United States call 1 800 772 5409 For international customers contact your order service agent 3 Direct all sho
233. r cables to the 110 type terminal blocks Use the following information to determine the cable size cable pairs required for either 3 pair or 4 pair circuits Note the length and size on the floor plan to aid in the ordering and installation of the station cables 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determine the size of station cables containing 3 pair circuits multiply the number of 3 pair circuits required at the satellite location by 3 5 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size This will provide additional pairs for growth and compensate for every twenty fifth pair in a cable that is not used 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determine the size of station cables containing 4 pair circuits find out how many information outlets are served by the equipment room MDF or satellite location MDF Multiply the number of information outlets by 4 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size gt NOTE This formula may not compensate for the unused twenty fifth pair in all cases If not it must be allowed for May 2002 150 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Before starting the patch cord installation obtain a copy of the Port Assignment Record forms from
234. ransfer 25 i E EX TT EL ESL TII 2 RI le C EERE TC TK LC ST TC TK LC ST TC TK LO ST TC TK LC ST TC LC ST T ALARM MONITORS EM TRANS RELAY PWR ACC PWR PP AAAA AAAA AAAA s 1M 1m 2M 2m 3M 3m 3w 1758580b MMR 042996 Figure notes 1 To Network Interface Circuitry 4 To Power Transfer Unit 2 To TN747 or Equivalent Central Office 5 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Pack Connector 3 To Blue or White Station Distribution Field May 2002 222 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension 10 L O 2820 ST MXR ST MXR HU LLLLT Ses e B E m Bei 4 Be im 5 8 m 6 I ww BRS PERE SERRE PEC eee ee e SHEHHBHE 1M 1m 2M 2m 3M 3m 3w ALARM MONITORS EM TRANS RELAY PWR ACC PWR y LLELLLLLLLLLLCLELLLLLLLLILULLULLLULLLCLLLELLECLCE ULULILELELLLEJI o r758582b MMR 042996 Figure notes To Network Interface Facility 4 To TN747 or Equivalent Central To Blue or White Station Distribution Office Trunk Circuit Pack Field 5 To Power Transfer Unit To TN2183 or Equivalent Analog Line 6 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Circuit Pack Connector Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field
235. ration 1 Type test tdm port network 1 and press Enter 2 Verify atest results screen similar to Sample Test Results for TDM Bus Port Network 1 is displayed 3 Ifresult is FAIL for any test check the connectors of the TDM bus cables in PN 2 4 Repeatthese steps for each PN to check the TDM bus cables Sample Test Results for TDM Bus Port Network 1 T test tdm port network 1 Port PN 01A PN 01A PN 01A PN 01B PN 01B PN 01B TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS TEST RESULTS 294 296 297 294 296 297 Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No PASS PASS ABORT PASS ABORT PASS Result 1005 1005 Error Code E May 2002 287 288 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network S8700 Multi Connect only If the configuration is critical reliability test the expansion interface exchange for each Port Network PN 1 Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter This displays the standby expansion link See Sample of Port Network Status before Expansion Link is Set 88700 Multi Connect 2 Type set expansion link UUCSS where UUCSS is one of the cabinet carrier and port locations of the standby expansion link and press Enter 3 Verify the bottom of the screen displays Command successfully completed 4 Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter
236. rcuit breaker located on the front of the power distribution unit 2 Be sure the main power to the power distribution unit is OFF 3 Atthe power distribution unit set all carrier circuit breakers OFF Typical Small Battery Assembly Battery connector psd batb RPY 061797 May 2002 56 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Small Battery Holdover Connect the small battery holdover cable to J20 See Power Distribution Unit J58890CH on page 57 Power Distribution Unit J58890CH psdf002i KLC 012400 Figure notes 1 External Alarm Cable Connector 2 RPOcable 3 Circuit Breakers 4 Pin6 RPO 5 Pin 2 RPO 6 External Alarm Cable May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 57 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Large Battery Holdover When using large battery holdover 1 battery media gateway is required for every S8700 Multi Connect configuration media gateway requiring holdover The 24 cell battery media gateway must have a float voltage of 54 2 VDC 1 Connect the 48 VDC cable to the large battery connector See Power Distribution Unit J58890CH on page 57 2 Connectthe 48 VDC RETURN cable to the ground terminal block 3 Connectthe temperature sensor cable from the battery media gateway to J20 gt NOTE An adapter cable may be required when connecting the temperature sensor
237. re Ethernet switches 35 media server 2 29 SNMP traps 28 UPS 33 connect UPS cables to Ethernet switches 32 connect AC power 96 connect to customer LAN 168 connect to customer network 168 connectable voice and data terminals 145 connecting AC power 59 65 connecting battery leads 55 connecting cabinet grounds 62 connecting control carrier outputs cable 153 connecting DC battery and power cabinet grounds 64 connecting DC power 87 connecting DC power to cabinets 66 connecting external alarm cable 71 connecting external alarm indicators 204 connecting fiber optic cable 73 critical reliability CSS system 75 high reliability CSS system 74 standard reliability CSS system 73 connecting ground wires DC systems 65 connecting large battery holdover 57 connecting mixed AC DC power and ground 67 connecting remote power off cable 69 connecting small battery holdover 56 connection diagrams station cables 140 May 2002 connections ITS network 173 connector 259A 173 console attendant testing 292 selector testing 292 control carrier cable labels 152 control carrier outputs cable 153 196 control carrier outputs cable installing 129 coupled bonding conductor 52 94 166 coupled bonding conductor wires installing 64 coupled bonding connector 133 critical reliability testing systems 288 critical reliability systems cabling 104 customer network connecting to 168 D damage reportin
238. returned from the target host May 2002 32 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack The following test is done from a customer desktop PC connected to the corporate LAN 1 Open a DOS command window Start Run Command 2 Ping the Active Server name if DNS is administered or IP address 3 Verify that the ping is executes successfully and a response is returned from the active Media Server Test media server 2 LEDs The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 using the 8700 Media Server Web Interface 1 Click Test Server LEDs to test the server LEDs 2 Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the media server front of media server and the transmit LED on the duplication card back of media server to ensure they are blinking Busy out standby media server The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 using the 8700 Media Server Web Interface This action will prevent unexpected interchanges during the remainder of the installation 1 Click Busy Out Server under the Server heading of the main menu 2 Click on Busy Out 3 Click View Summary Status and verify that media server 2 is busied out Connect UPS cables to Ethernet Switch es Connect the CATS straight through cables from the UPS SNMP module to the Ethernet switch Refer to Getting Started with Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connec
239. rformed from both ASA and the S8700 Media Server Web Interface while connected to the active media server 1 From ASA type list ipserver interface and press Enter e Verify that all ISPI circuit packs are translated 2 From the 58700 Media Server Web Interface under Diagnostics click on Execute Pingall Select Other Server s All IPSIs Ethernet switches and click on Execute Pingall e Verify that all endpoints respond correctly Verify IPSI circuit pack version 1 From the S8700 Media Server Web Interface under Installation and Upgrades click on View IPSI Version Select Query All and click on the button View IPSI Version e Verify the firmware release for each TN2312AP IPSI If upgrade is required go to Upgrading the Avaya S8700 Media Server Configurations Enable control of IPserver interfaces gt NOTE The next procedure will enable the IPSI circuit packs and allow them to control the port networks 1 Type change system parameters ipserver interface and press Enter m system parameters ipserver interface Page 1 of 1 D IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION IPSI Host Name Prefix vodka Primary Control Subnet Address 198 152 254 0 Secondary Control Subnet Address 198 152 255 0 OPTIONS Switch Identifier A IPSI Control of Port Networks enabled de P 2 Setthe IPSI Control of Port Networks field to enabled 3 Press Enter to effect the change May 2002 Installing the
240. rier is in the correct location for that carrier See Port Media Gateway Address Plug Location Rear of Media Gateway on page 98 The factory default setting is B callout 2 Port Media Gateway Address Plug Location Rear of Media Gateway 9 9 mom 9 eje add plug CJL 050906 Figure notes 1 Address Plug shown set to carrier D 5 Right Edge of Media Gateway 2 Carrier B Jumper Location Default 6 Backplane Slot 00 3 Carrier C Jumper Location 7 To Connector Panel 4 Right Edge of Backplane May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 99 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Rear Panels Install the rear panels and loosely thread each screw See Rear Panel Screw Locations on page 99 For un stacked media gateways tighten the screws securely For a stack of media gateways allow the screws labeled callout 4 to remain loose These screws are tightened when the ground plates are installed Be sure the Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cables and the Inter Cabinet Cables ICC are not pinched by the panels Also be sure the cables are routed through the channels provided on the rear panels Rear Panel Screw Locations Q MUUN Wnt MUUN Mull grnd plt CJL 030696 Figure notes 1 Expansion Control Media Gateway A No ground plate is installed on an un stacked media gateway Rear Ground Plate attache
241. rity Telecommunications security of voice data and or video communi cations is the prevention of any type of intrusion to that is either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of your company s tele communications equipment by some party Your company s telecommunications equipment includes both this Avaya product and any other voice data video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product that is networked equipment An outside party is anyone who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Whereas a malicious party is anyone including someone who may be other wise authorized who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent Such intrusions may be either to through synchronous time multi plexed and or circuit based or asynchronous character message or packet based equipment or interfaces for reasons of Utilization of capabilities special to the accessed equipment Theft such as of intellectual property financial assets or toll facility access e Eavesdropping privacy invasions to humans Mischief troubling but apparently innocuous tampering Harm such as harmful tampering data loss or alteration regardless of motive or intent Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associ ated with your system and or its networked equipment Also realize that if such an i
242. rnet cables 249 connect ribbon cables 243 faceplate 278 program switch ID and cabinet 254 upgrade firmware 261 TN2312AP IP Server Interface LEDs 277 TN2501AP integrated announcements faceplate LEDs and interpretation 181 TN799DP circuit pack 295 TN799DP C LAN 169 installing 169 tone clocks service state 283 transfer emergency testing 293 translations backing up 264 input to active media server 37 saving 264 troubleshooting 8700 IP Connect installation 297 8700 Multi Connect installation 297 trunk cables installing 130 trunk pairs connecting with concentrator cables 153 trunk pairs connecting with jumper wires 154 trunk transmission testing 294 U uniform call distribution testing queue warning indicator 293 upgrading cajun Ethernet switch firmware 262 IPSI firmware 261 UPS configure 33 connect Ethernet switch cables 32 LEDs 276 using DHCP IP address 255 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 307 Index verify connectivity to media servers 260 date and time 29 IPSI circuit pack version 40 media server 1 connection to LAN 27 media server 2 connection to LAN 31 translations 262 view alarms 263 voice and data terminals connectable 145 voice terminals exposed environments 212 WwW wall mounting plates 231 wiring 1146B power distribution unit 234 2 wire digital station 190 alarm 190 analog station 190 analog tie trunk 192 battery 232 CO trunk 190 DID tru
243. round Discharge Bar Connect DC Battery Frame Ground 1 Cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the DC power cabinet and the DC battery cabinet See Frame Ground Wiring Between cabinet and Battery Cabinet on page 85 Crimp a terminal lug on the each end of the wire The terminal lugs are furnished as part of D 181895 kit of parts At the DC battery cabinet attach the 6 AWG 2540 6 4 mm wire to the frame ground mounting hole using a pan head slotted screw star washer and hex nut Tighten the screw securely Route the opposite end of the wire to the DC power cabinet Attach the 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire to the mounting hole in the top of the cabinet Use a pan head slotted screw star washer and hex nut Tighten the screw securely May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 85 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Frame Ground Wiring Between cabinet and Battery Cabinet dc rect RBP 052996 Figure notes 1 6AWG 40 4mm Wire 5 Terminal Lug Part of D 18181895 2 DC Battery Cabinet 6 Pan Head Slotted Screw 3 DC power cabinet 7 Star Washer 4 Grounding Hole in Top of cabinet 8 Hex Nut Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground 1 Measure and cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the GROUND DISCHARGE bar in the DC power cabinet and the GRD connector on the DC powered Distribution Unit See Groun
244. rt Cables May 2002 163 164 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Sneak Fuse Panels For general information see Sneak Fuse Panels on page 127 The Model 507B Sneak Fuse Panel on page 164 or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection The panel contains two 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and two spares See Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout on page 165 for pinout data 1 Locate the 507B near the network interface or the Main Distribution Frame MDF 2 Hold the panel against the mounting surface and mark the mounting screw locations Drill pilot holes at the marked locations and partially install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the two bottom mounting slots 3 Slide the sneak fuse panel onto the mounting screws and tighten the screws securely 4 Install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the top two mounting slots and tighten securely 5 Repeat the procedure for each sneak fuse panel 6 Secure the B25A cable to the panel with the captive screw on the connector and a supplied cable tie Model 507B Sneak Fuse Panel Sneak Current Protector 507B sneak CJL 032096 Figure notes 1 Sneak Fuse Panel 4 220029 Fuses Inside Panel Use 2 25 Pair Male Connector In small screwdriver to pry top cover off 3 25 Pair Female Connector
245. rt shipped reports to the nearest MSL 4 Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions Position the Media Gateway Each media gateway is normally positioned adjacent to the control hardware in the rack or another media gateway gt NOTE Typically the center stage switch is collocated with a port network PN It is not required to be located in port network 1 1 Ifthe S8700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork space the media gateways on 32 in 81 3 cm centers 1 8 in 0 3 cm They must be level and must be square with respect to each other 2 If the 58700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable slack managers place the media gateways far enough from the connection field to lay down the 32 in 81 3 cm slack managers and to provide a little extra room for the cables to access the cable slack managers 3 If earthquake protection is required Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 46 4 Ifearthquake protection is not required level the media gateways and adjust and lock the media gateway stabilizing bolts to keep it from moving 5 At the bottom of the media gateway install the hole plugs provided in the holes previously occupied by the 4 carriage bolts May 2002 46 X Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional 1 Position the auxiliary cabinet next to the control hardware in
246. s The Model 507B sneak current fuse panel or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection The panel contains two 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and two spares Connector cables B25A male to female connect the network interface to the sneak fuse panel Also 157B connecting blocks equipped with SCP 110 protectors can be used for sneak current protection Sneak Fuse Panel Ordering Information Description Comcode 157B Connecting Block 403613003 SCP 110 Protector 406948976 507B Sneak Current Fuse Panel 107435091 220029 Sneak Current Fuse 407216316 gt NOTE Sneak current protectors with a rating of 350 mA at 600 volts must be Underwriter s Laboratory UL listed for domestic installation and Canadian Standards Association CSA certified for Canadian installation The 507B includes 52 sneak fuses and two cables and can be ordered using PEC code 63210 The SCP 110 protectors are used with 110 type hardware and on the 507B Sneak Fuse Panel The SCP 110 Protectors can be ordered separately and installed on the 157B connecting block Fifty protectors are required per block May 2002 128 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Cable Installation Cable Installation gt NOTE To route the cables from the rear of the SCC stack or MCC to the MDF use the Install Cable Slack Managers on page 162 procedure Also see Cable Slack Manager on page 134
247. s 1 Ports in use 3 Power 2 CPU boot status 4 Lights if this module is the Cajun P33x stack master agent For descriptions of the other LEDs refer to the quick start guide and user guide that comes with the model of Cajun Ethernet switch you have May 2002 276 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration UPS LEDs The Powerware front panel has the LEDs shown in LEDs on Powerware 9125 UPS LEDs on Powerware 9125 UPS ledlups KLC 030102 Figure notes Off button On button 1 Normal mode indicator Battery mode indicator Bypass mode indicator Bar graph indicators A OO N N O0 GC Test Alarm reset button Alarm indicators After plugging the UPS in all the LEDs flash briefly After a self test the Normal mode LED flashes indicating that the UPS is in Standby mode For more information on the LEDs refer to the UPS user s guide that comes with the Powerware 9125 UPS Telephone Console LEDS Telephones and attendant consoles have some alarm LEDs that must be checked out May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 277 Testing the Complete Configuration Attendant Console LEDs The console has 2 red LEDs labeled ALM and ACK The ALM LED lights steadily when there is a major or minor alarm at the media server The ACK LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported to INADS If the media server is unable t
248. s process gt NOTE Make sure your networking and Web browser settings are correct Refer to Pre Installation Information S8700 Multi Connect 1 Plugserverl into UPS 1 to power it up Refer to Getting Started with Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration 2 Onthelaptop Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box Type command and press Enter to open a MSDOS Command Line window 4 Type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear MAC cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The command line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the MAC cache Launch the Web browser 6 Type 192 11 13 6 in the Location Netscape or Address Internet Explorer field to bring up the Web interface May 2002 22 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack A about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help eak 9 A A Reach GFavorites CBristory Be S gt NOTE The first time you attempt to login you get a Web page asking to install a security certificate Follow the instructions for your particular browser to accept the certificate You can also install the certificate on your services laptop computer by following the instructions in your browsers online help Using Net
249. s wiring design 135 station circuit distribution 140 Stratum 3 clock 107 cabling 110 checking AC power 108 connecting to DC power 108 cross connects high or critical reliability 112 standard reliability 112 grounding cabinet 108 installing 107 LED indicators 295 maximum cabling distance 112 setting options 109 testing LED indicators 295 wiring 112 Stratum 3 clock administering 296 Stratum 3 clock connecting AC power 107 Stratum 3 clock inspecting 107 Stratum 3 clock testing 295 Stratum 3 clock timing 296 System status checking 283 System test alarms 296 T T1 CSU and DS1 tie trunk 193 T1 E1 status LEDs 283 TDM bus service state 283 TDM bus cables 96 TDM testing 287 telephone calls making test calls 291 telephone pin designations 191 198 207 telephones connecting 188 emergency transfer 222 223 May 2002 terminal alarm notification alarms 277 terminal blocks frame mounting 160 terminal blocks wall mounting 158 terminals connecting 140 terminating trunk transmission test types 294 test IPSI connectivity 40 media server 1 LEDs 28 media server 2 LEDs 32 test types terminating trunk transmission 294 testing complete configuration 271 three phase VAC power 50 tie trunk analog wiring 192 digital wiring 192 TILTWATCH indicators 44 time division multiplexor See TDM TN2302AP Amphenol adapter 173 TN2302AP IP Media Processor 171 TN2312AP connect Ethe
250. s because it has the same battery backup as the media gateway See Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only on page 196 gt NOTE Adjunct power can be provided locally at the telephone or console by either the 1151A1 or 1151A2 power supply Adjunct power can be provided from the equipment room or equipment closet with the 1145B power unit Go to Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies on page 226 for power supply information and installation procedures May 2002 190 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug 1749428 KLC 060396 Figure notes 1 Flush Mounted Information Outlet 4 400B2 Adapter 2 Surface Mounted Information Outlet 5 To Telephone 3 To Individual Power Unit 6 Destination Service Access Point DSAP Power Cord Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station This example is typical of the 2 wire digital stations 2420 64xx 302D 2 wire analog stations 500 2500 71xx analog Central Office CO trunks Direct Inward Dial DID trunks and external alarms See 2500 Type Analog Telephone Wiring on page 191 1 Choose a peripheral to connect such as a 2 wire digital station 2 Choose the port circuit pack to use and its carrier and slot number from Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 191 For example TN2183 Analog Line Cabinet 1 Carrier C Sl
251. s for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country containing the equipment Ground DC power media gateways on page 83 and Connect DC Power on page 87 or Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways on page 94 e Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables on page 96 e Verify Port Media Gateway Address Plugs on page 98 e Install Rear Panels on page 99 e Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection on page 100 or Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection on page 101 or Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection on page 103 e Connect 8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables on page 104 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm all equipment is present 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions 3 If any equipment is missing report the information to your Avaya representative May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 79 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways A CAUTION Lifting the media gateway requires two people as it may weigh as much as 130 pounds
252. s the 1145B2 A console s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is 800 feet 244 m for a 302A1 350 feet 106 8 m for a 301B1 and 302D May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 203 Installing and Wiring Telephones Hard Wire Bridging Analog type hard wire bridging is not allowed for any DCP endpoints Hard wire bridging provides no way of combining the digital output of two bridged DCP sets Also a bridged endpoint causes degradation of the DCP signal CAUTION Bridging or paralleling these endpoints can cause electrical damage to the consoles or cause the circuit pack to remove power from the consoles Dual Wiring of Two Wire and Four Wire Endpoints Do not simultaneously wire a two wire and four wire endpoint to the same equipment location in an MDF The Avaya configurations use separate circuit packs to interface two and four wire endpoints Install the Attendant Console 1 Install the Attendant Console and connect the modular cord to the information outlet 2 Install labels per the Attendant Console form and the Display Module form assignments 3 Install a Digital Line circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required 4 Administer the forms listed in Attendant Console in Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software 302D Console phdf302 KLC 101196 May 2002 204 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones
253. s unless the customer requests it refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet S6700 Multi Connect May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 25 Configure the Hardware in the Rack 13 Fill in the fields on the Set Server Identities and the subsequent pages gt NOTE Configure Ethernet Interfaces Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Configure Time Server Set Modem Interface Update System The server is not configured until you click Continue on the Update System page 14 When you complete all the fields the Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes it The last line says System modifications completed 15 Scroll down to view the software release number Verify that the expected release number is displayed If it is the expected release go to Install license and Avaya authentication files on page 25 If it is not the expected release go to Downloading License and Authentication Files on page 16 then go to Upgrading Software on an Initial Installation of an Avaya S8700 Media Server The upgrade process includes installing the license file Install license and Avaya authentication files Installing the license and Avaya authentication files is a 2 step process 1 Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to Media Server 1 on page 25 2 Install the license and Avaya authentication files on page 26
254. scape Follow the instructions in the New Site Certificate wizard Select Accept the certificate for this session New Site Certificate Netscape TE e May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 23 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Using Internet Explorer Follow the instructions in the Security Alert wizard Security Alert xi changed by others However there is a problem with the site s f Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or security certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority e The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes View Certificate 7 Loginas craft 8 When asked Do you want to suppress alarms select yes gt NOTE The menu choices are in the left panel 9 Scroll down the menu to Installation and Upgrades Miscellaneous Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports Upload Files to Server via browser Download Files to Server from web Server Configuration and Upgrades View Software Version Configure Server Install New Software Release Make Server Upgrade Permanent View Partiton Status Reset to Defaults gt NOTE For help with any of the web pages click About This Page on the web page or Help at
255. sole 2 Choose the port circuit pack and its carrier and slot number such as cabinet 1 carrier C slot 02 3 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack such as Port 05 4 Install cross connect jumpers to wire the terminal to the port circuit pack See 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring on page 189 This pinout is for the 4 wire Digital Line circuit pack A CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console Use an 1151A1 1151A2 1145A or MSP 1 power unit 5 For terminals needing adjunct power wire 48 VDC and ground to appropriate pins on the terminal See 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring on page 189 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 189 Installing and Wiring Telephones 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring 9 9 TXT 1 2 39 TXT5 TXR 2 lt _ lt 20 3 14 TXR5 PXT 3 amp 3 9 5 40 PXT5 PXR 6 4 4 gt 15 PXR5 Q o O a gt gt 302cwire RBP 040596 Figure notes 1 302D Attendant Console 3 48 VDC From Adjunct Power 2 4 wire Digital Line Circuit Pack 4 Ground From Adjunct Power Position 1C02 Connect Adjunct Power The 400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local 48 VDC power to a modular plug See 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug on page 190 Each port network can provide power for up to three attendant consoles This source of power is preferred for the attendant console
256. stalling the 88700 Multi Connect 167 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Coupled Bonding Conductor Figure notes 1 25 Pair Tip amp Ring Cables to Media Gateways Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC Terminal Block Tie Wraps Cable Shield or Six Spare Pairs Ground on Carbon Block Protector or Equivalent Trunk Cable to Network Interface 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm Wire foe 10 11 12 13 14 cbc_gnd_1 PDH 062696 To Network Media Gateways Battery Plant Ground Discharge Bar for Single Point Ground Cross Connect Ground Block Main Distribution Frame MDF To Other Cross Connect Ground Blocks Approved Ground Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC May 2002 168 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Connecting to the Customer s Network The 8700 Media Server for IP Connect and Multi Connect Configurations connect directly to the customer s network in several ways They can connect through the e Avaya M S8700 Media Server on page 168 e TN799DP Control LAN on page 169 e The TN2302AP IP Media Processor on page 171 e TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL on page 178 e Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator on page 185 Avaya S8700 Media Server In a typical configuration you connect to the network through a port on the back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server using a standard CAT5 cable with RJ45 c
257. stored in a cold environment should be protected from condensation during storage and warming Batteries should be stabilized at room temperature prior to use after cold storage Do not install batteries if the manufacturing date on the label indicates that the batteries are more than six months old Mounting the 1145B2 1146B2 Power Supply 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement on page 229 shows how the standard power supply and wall mounting plates fit together Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 230 shows the expanded power supply components power distribution unit and T cable A manual switch on the distribution unit allows the user to redirect reserve power to outputs 1 through 32 so all outputs are provided battery reserve power or to outputs 1 through 8 to provide high power above 6 25 watts gt NOTE The switch must be set to the 1 32 position The 1145B22 1146B2 is a 48V power supply with 275 watts total output Each output circuit is current limited by a Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient Resistance Device PTC that limits the maximum output to 12 watts Each 1146B2 output has an LED to indicate the status of the PTC If the LED is on the PTC has a short on that power pair Not all outputs can simultaneously provide 12 watts The average power per output cannot exceed 8 6 watts 275 32 8 6 The 1145B22 is designed to power one ISDN terminal or DCP adjunct per output The maximum number of terminals
258. t Configuration for a connectivity guide May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 33 Configure the Hardware in the Rack Configure the UPSs gt NOTE The following procedure is specific to the Powerware 9125 equipped with a Connectups SNMP Module If a different UPS is used refer to it s accompanying documentation to set the IP Address Subnet mask trap receiver IP address and community strings The SNMP module in the UPS must be administered so it can report alarm conditions to the appropriate server The module will report the loss of commercial power and or the depletion of battery resources Each UPS requires a unique IP address which can be the Avaya provided default one or a customer provided one Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet S6700 Multi Connect gt NOTE In order for the UPS to properly report alarm conditions the IP addresses for the UPS must be configured in the S8700 Media Servers e 2 P addresses 1 for each UPS 1 Default gateway IP address Subnet mask Community name strings get set trap SECURITY ALERT The Get and Set community names are generally configured with default values of Public and Private respectively If required the local network administrator must supply values for their Network Management System This is a security issue For example the default Set community name of Private with it s widely known password could be used to shutd
259. t and listen for dial tone 4 The green lamp associated with Idle Call Appearance lights up The Position Available lamp goes dark 5 Dial number associated with a working telephone Audible ringing tone is heard in ear piece 6 Press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced The green lamp associated with idle call appearance button goes dark The Position Available lamp lights Test Selector Console Check that all selector console lamps are operational Make call to a telephone in the configuration 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button on the attendant console This puts the console in the self test mode 2 Eachrow of lamps on the selector console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom 3 Press hundreds group select button The hundreds group select lamp lights and any lamps associated with busy telephone light 4 Press Direct Extension Selection DXS button for the desired extension Audible ringing tone is heard in the ear piece on attendant console 5 Onattendant console press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced Test External Ringing Make a test call to the attendant console to verify ringing device sounds when the Night lamp on console is lighted If ringing device has not been installed by customer connect spare telephone to information outlet reserved for ringing device and make test call May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 293 Testing t
260. t connecting each media gateway to the single point ground block 7 Connecta 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to an unused terminal on the single point ground block 8 Route the ground wire to the AC load center ground and connect Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram RBRRRBERBR PEEPEEEEDUT L widfspgb KLC 100297 Figure notes 1 First Media Gateway 5 2 Additional Media Gateways if installed 6 3 6 AWG 40 16 mm Media Gateway GROUND Wire 8 4 Single Point Ground Block 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm Ground Wire to Approved Ground AC Load Center Single Point Ground Over 50 ft 15 2 m Media Gateway Ground Terminal Block May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 55 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 Typical Small Battery Assembly on page 55 shows a typical optional small battery holdover assembly These assemblies may ship with the battery leads disconnected to prevent the batteries from discharging 1 Plug the battery connector into the 48 VDC Batteries connector on the rear of the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged When procedures require ALL power to be removed from the media gateway and to prevent unnecessary discharging of the battery turn off the main ci
261. t hardware damage The wire must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution Task List Connect DC Power and Ground Perform these tasks to connect DC power and ground power distribution unit J58890CH 1 Only Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit on page 60 e Connect Power and Ground s on page 62 Perform these tasks to connect DC Power and Ground J58890CF Only gt NOTE These installation tasks correspond to the numbers in Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 60 e Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires on page 64 e Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets on page 64 e Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground on page 64 e Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet on page 65 e Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems on page 65 e Turn Circuit Breakers Off on page 65 e Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways on page 66 May 2002 60 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway e Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet on page 67 If necessary Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground on page 67 Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet 1 AWG 48 V RTN PN 48 V RTN PN1 48 V 48 V RTN i P
262. t may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table Manufacturer s Port FIC Code SOC REN Network Identifier A S Code Jacks Off On premises station OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X RJLIC DID trunk 02RV2 T 0 0B RJ2GX RJ21X CO trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X CO trunk 02LS2 0 3A RJ21X Tie trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX Basic Rate Interface 02IS5 6 0F 6 0Y RJA9C 1 544 digital interface 04DU9 BN 6 0F RJ48C 1KN 1SN RJ48M 120A2 channel service unit 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C If the terminal equipment for example the MultiVantage Solution equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone com pany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of ser vice may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equip ment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experien
263. t of the cabinet number is flashing press the button until the correct tens digit 0 through 6 shows on the display When the correct number shows stop It will flash a few times then stop five seconds The second digit of the cabinet number will begin flashing 5 While the second digit of the cabinet number is flashing press the button until the correct units digit 0 through 9 shows on the display When the correct number shows stop The units digit will flash a few times then stop five seconds May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 257 Connect the Hardware 6 All segments of the display will go dark for one second and then the Switch ID and Cabinet number will be displayed in the top three characters of the LED display A V will be shown in the fourth character bottom of the display When an address has been assigned to the IPSI by the DHCP server the center of the V will be filled in to form the bottom half of a diamond in the display NZ CLK C fpdlled2 LJK 022502 E 7 For high or critical reliability configuration repeat steps 1 through 6 for the IPSI in carrier B zmmo 8 Press excess ribbon against the circuit packs Using static addressing For the IPSI circuit packs to get static IP addresses you must administer them directly through the Ethernet port connection on the IPSI faceplate top port See Connecting directly to the IPSI on page 258 May 2002 258
264. t packs associated with the S8700 Media Server for IP connect configurations always use the static addressing method gt NOTE Before beginning read this procedure to familiarize yourself with it With DHCP addressing there are certain sequences that need to be completed prior to a predetermined time out interval A CAUTION When reusing TN2312 circuit packs that have previously had a static address programmed you must erase the existing IP address Failure to do this may result in serious network problems for the customer Use the following procedure to erase an existing IP address assignment e Plug the TN2312 into a tone clock slot or reseat it unplug and plug in if it is already plugged in While the letters IP are flashing on the LED display five seconds press the recessed push button on the faceplate of the circuit pack The TN2312 is now ready to have another static IP address programmed or a Switch ID and Cabinet number programmed for use in a DHCP configuration gt NOTE When the IPSI circuit pack is first inserted into a carrier the faceplate LED display may present random characters dots or lines This should not last more than one second Ignore the display during this period Using DHCP addressing For the IPSI circuit packs to get IP addresses dynamically you must first assign the switch ID A through J and the cabinet number 01 through 64 to each IPSI circuit pack 1 Fully insert the TN2312 IPSI cir
265. t the LAN cable to the RJ 45 connector on the Backplane Adapter May 2002 182 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network Configuring the MultiVantage Software for the TN2501AP After you have installed the hardware to support an FTP session you must Administer the IP connections on page 182 e Test the IP connections on page 185 Administer the IP connections Use Avaya Site Administration for this administration Verify circuit pack location 1 Type list configuration board board location and press Enter The System Configuration report appears Use this report to ensure that the Multi Vantage software recognizes the TN2501AP circuit pack after it is latched in the carrier slot ise configuration board 1c08 page RON SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p psa 01C08 VAL ANNOUNCEMENT TN2501AP HWOO FWOO1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 U Cad Successfully completed m 2 Verify the following field values Board Type shows VAL ANNOUNCEMENT e Code is TN2501AP May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 183 Connecting to the Customer s Network Administer the node names 1 Type change node names ip and press Enter The IP Node Names screen appears Use this screen to administer the circuit pack s node name MTS node names ip Page 1 of 1
266. ta and Consoles voice 302B1 302C1 Attendant Console 603A D Automatic Call Distribution ACD Console CallMaster digital console 603E Automatic Call Distribution ACD Console CallMaster digital console May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 147 Administration Terminals Administration Terminals Administration of the Avaya MultiVantage TM Solution is accomplished via Web interface This requires a Netscape or Internet Explorer browser Administration of the Avaya MultiVantage TM software is accomplished via Avaya Site Administration ASA ASA is available on the S8700 Media Server May 2002 148 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Layout Layout This section has information about e Information Outlet Locations on page 148 e Site Satellite and Adapter Locations on page 148 e Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables on page 148 e Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables on page 148 e 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits on page 149 e 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits on page 149 Information Outlet Locations The customer or marketing representative must provide floor plans showing the information outlet locations and types flush or surface mounted required The floor plans must also show a complete overview of all conduit and cabling facilities in the building Site Satellite and Adapter Locations Use the following information when determining sit
267. tack of SCC1 Media Gateways or 4 G600 Media Gateways in a rack making up one port network A port network is defined as a group of media gateways or carriers connected together with one TDM bus Task List Test the Configuration A CAUTION To prevent unnecessary trouble tickets do not enable the alarms Alarm Origination feature until all installation and administration procedures are completed Check Port Network Status for Each Media Gateway Check Circuit Pack Configuration Test Media Server Interchange Test the IPSI Circuit Pack Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs 88700 Multi Connect only Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network Oo 0 FF OQ I Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network 88700 Multi Connect only 8 Save Translations if Required May 2002 272 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration LED Indicators Refer to the maintenance book for your configuration for detailed alarm and LED descriptions If a maintenance object begins to fail some periodic tests the media server will generate an alarm The media server identifies 3 levels of alarms Major Alarms Failures that cause critical degradation of service and require immediate attention Minor Alarms Failures that cause some degradation of service but do not cause a critical portion of the configuration to be inoperable This c
268. tays off continuously This indicates that the media server is hung or powered off the controller is stuck or the media server is using a new or different LED controller If the media server is hung you do not need to do anything It should automatically reboot and fix itself If the media server does not reboot itself power it down and then reboot it If an LED is clearly stuck or has a burned out element ignore the indicators until you can conveniently replace the media server The LEDs on the back of the media server There are 2 sets of LEDs on the back of the media server 1 set for the 4 port NIC card and 1 set for the fiber optic cable used for memory shadowing The GREEN LEDs to the right of the NIC ports light up when they are in use The GREEN LEDs to the right of the fiber optic cable indicate that the cables are connected correctly May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 275 Testing the Complete Configuration Cajun Ethernet Switch LEDs The Cajun Ethernet Switch has the LEDs shown in LEDs on Cajun P333T Ethernet switch LEDs on Cajun P333T Ethernet switch 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 c EXPANSION e e e e e e o o e o o eee SLOT e o o o e e e e e e o e ee o o eee 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 c e e eoevoveveveeeeee FIV LNK COL Tx Rx FDX FC Hspd LAG ledi333t KLC 030602 Figure note
269. ter change ip interfaces Page 1 of 12N IP INTERFACES Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn n MEDPRO 01B11 TN2302 prowler 255 255 255 0 172 16 23 254 1 y C LAN 05B11 TN799 C sriclan2 255 255 24B 0 IT7T2 165 22 2546 3 y MEDPRO 07B09 TN2302 prowlerl 255 255 248 0 lTZelb 2220 20294 2 y MEDPRO 07B10 TN2302 prowler2 255 255 248 0 172 160 23 254 3 y MEDPRO 03A11 TN2302 prowler3 255 255 248 0 112516 423 4254 2 y MEDPRO 05A12 TN2302 prowler5 255 255 248 0 172 16 23 254 2 y C LAN 01A11 TN799 C traf clan 255 255 248 0 IFTE 23 254 lt 2 n 2591925942550 n 255 290 299 0 n 2554290425540 n 255 2554255 0 n 25942993129 9 0 n 2050 s 2503 2010 lt 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 2554255025540 oe x gt NOTE The customer provides the IP address subnet mask and gateway address May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 177 Connecting to the Customer s Network 5 Type in the following information for the TN2302AP IP Media Processor and TN799DP C LAN gt NOTE Enable the Ethernet port last after you have filled in the information in the other fields Set Slot field to UUCSS where UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot The Code and SFX fields are automatically populated with TN799DP and TN2302AP In the Node Name field type the same node name entered on the Node Name screen Inthe Subnet Mask field use the default setting unless you are given a different subnet m
270. ter Saves configuration and restarts module When completed disconnect the services laptop computer from the UPS Connect a CATS cable to the RJ45 connector on the UPS SNMP module and to the next available port on the Cajun Ethernet switch for Control Network A May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Configure the Hardware in the Rack 19 Repeat steps 5 through 18 for the second UPS except connect the SNMP module to the Ethernet switch for Control Network B Use the following address and netmask information UPS IPaddress Subnet mask 198 152 255 239 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway IP address 198 152 255 202 Host Table trap receiver IP address 198 152 255 202 Local network administrator supplied information as required Configure the Ethernet Switch es The SNMP subagent in the Ethernet switch must be administered so it can report alarms to the appropriate server when the hardware experiences problems Refer to the Job Aids for Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration for the proper addresses and community strings At a minimum the following items need to be configured IP address 1 for each equipped Ethernet switch e Subnet mask Community string get set trap Refer to the configuration section of the user guide that comes with the Ethernet switch for the default user ID password and configuration commands Use the following general procedures to administer the Ethernet switch es
271. the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Each line circuit pack connects to one 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block One 25 pair cable is required for each line circuit pack gt NOTE The 16 port analog line circuit pack requires an adapter cable to connect from one connector on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration to two 25 pair connectors on a terminal block Two MET circuit packs require a concentrator cable to connect from two connectors on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration to one 25 pair connector on a terminal block The yellow field auxiliary field terminates all 25 pair cables from the auxiliary cabinet and the Processor Interface The yellow field is located in the lower right hand corner of the distribution field The white field station field terminates the station wiring The white field indicates 3 pair station circuits eight circuits per 25 pair cable routed through a satellite closet The blue field station field also terminates station wiring The blue field indicates 3 and or 4 pair station circuits eight or six circuits respectively per 25 pair cable The fourth pair of the 4 pair station circuit provides adjunct power from the cross connect field on an as needed basis to terminals within 250 feet 76 m of the MDF May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 123 Main Distribution Frame Main Distribution Frame The preferred location of the Main Distribution Frame MDF is directly behind the
272. the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Position the Media Gateway Stacks CAUTION Lifting the media gateway may require 2 people as it may weigh as much as 130 pounds 60 kilograms Use caution to avoid injury Before beginning the media gateway installation check the location of the AC DC power receptacles The receptacles must be on separately fused circuits not controlled by wall switches They must be located within 10 feet 3 meters of the media gateway and outside the Main Distribution Frame MDF area Refer to the serial numbers and lettered designation strips in the Customer Service Document CSD when stacking the media gateways If earthquake protection is required skip to Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway on page 80 Return to this section when finished Perform this step first for all standard reliability media gateway stack installations 1 Install the media gateway stack Place expansion control media gateway A J58890N on the floor in the position determined when the room layout was planned Set port media gateway B J58890H on top of expansion control media gateway A Set port media gateway C J58890H on top of port media gateway B Set port media gateway D J58890H on top of port media gateway C 2 Install 2 through 44 media gateway stacks using the instructions in step 1 Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gatewa
273. the Stratum 3 clock and the CSU is shown in Maximum Cabling Distance on page 112 For standard reliability configurations refer to Cross Connects for Standard Reliability on page 113 to cross connect the TN780 and CLOCK end connections to the Stratum 3 Clock connections on the cross connect module For high or critical reliability configurations refer to Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability on page 114 to cross connect the TN780 and CLOCK end connections to the Stratum 3 Clock connections on the cross connect module The common cross connection from the TN780 in A and B carriers to the Stratum 3 Clock should be done by bridging the jumper wires Dress the cables down sides of the cabinet and run through the Cable Slack Manager if provided Administer per the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Maximum Cabling Distance Channel Service Maximum Cabling Unit CSU Distance 551A 85 Feet 26 m 551V 85 Feet 26 m 551V EFS R 655 Feet 199 6 m EFS T1 655 Feet 199 6 m May 2002 Cross Connects for Standard Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Install the Stratum 3 clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connecting Connecting Lead Block Lead Block Designation Lead Color Terminal Designation Lead Color Terminal RREFI W BL 1 V O 43 TREFI BL W p O V 44 To Y Cable Clock End Secondary RREF2 W O V O 43 TRE
274. the media gateways to follow these cables to the Main Distribution Frame MDF and to terminate at the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC wires are installed and terminated in Cabling Port Networks on page 116 May 2002 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 95 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Typical AC Power and Ground Layout Rear 9 oS SS SS S A S S S a a a a a a a a a a EUER eae Sea Tirohia bee bee bok nun ha B aa a a ORO a ee ek bs Ig A DOE r781851b CJL 030896 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 N Expansion Control Media Gateway A in Stack 1 Circuit Breaker AC Power Receptacle Media Gateway Stack Single Point Ground Block 8 foot 2 5 meters Power Cord National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA 5 15 or 5 20 Receptacle or Equivalent 6 AWG 40 4 mm2 Ground Wire to Approved Ground 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm2 Wire to Coupled Bonding Conductor May 2002 96 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Set the Ringer Frequency CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap The default ringer frequency setting on the 1217A power supply for North America is 20 Hz and the international setting can be either 20 Hz or 25 Hz To set the ringer frequency on the 1217A power
275. the packing slip The carton should contain the items in Required Hardware on page 172 for each TN2302AP IP Media Processor ordered 3 Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory Required Hardware Comcode Code Description Quantity 108312612 TN2302AP IP Media Processor 1 848525887 TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter 1 108525528 TN799DP C LAN circuit pack 1 One TN799DP supports more than one TN2302AP 102631413 ADPTR 259A connector 1 The adapter has an amphenol connector on one side and an RJ45 connector on the other for connecting to the network See TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter on page 173 gt NOTE The customer must provide one CATS or better cable for each TN2302AP May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 173 Connecting to the Customer s Network TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter addfipm2 KLC 083000 Figure notes 1 Amphenol connector to backplane 2 Tonetwork connector corresponding to TN2302AP slot 3 9 pin connector for maintenance Installing the TN2302AP IP Media Processor Connect the cables for TN799DP 1 Determine into which port slots you are putting the TN799DP C LAN circuit packs From the rear of the media gateway 2 Connecta 259A connector to the Amphenol connector corresponding to each TN799DP slot 3 Connect one end of each DWS cable to each 259A connector Connect the cables for TN2302AP 1 Determine into which port slots you are putti
276. this figure the following example is used 1 If25 telephones are connected to the media gateway and all 25 telephones need adjunct power install a bulk power supply in the equipment room 2 If only ten of the telephones need adjunct power install a bulk power supply at the satellite location 3 If only one telephone needs adjunct power install the individual power supply at the work location May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Example Adjunct Power Connections 2 e I I I I I I I I I c ce e i r e mL i 3n pL I I I I I I Figure notes 1 Typical Display Telephone 2 Individual Power Supply Such as 1151A1 or 1151A2 Information Outlet Modular Jack 4 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable Satellite Site or Adapter Location 25 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable 0o 0 FF Q Station Side of Main Distribution Frame MDF 10 11 13 14 R P cydfadjn KLC 020599 100P6A Patch Cord or Jumpers Media Gateway Side of Main Distribution Frame MDF 25 Pair Cable to Media Gateway Analog Line Circuit Pack Equipment Room Satellite Location Work Location Bulk Power Supply Such as 1145B Attendant Console Example Task List Attendant Console Procedures Install the Attendant Console on page
277. tion May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 291 Testing the Complete Configuration Task List Perform Acceptance Tests 1 Make Test Calls 2 Test 302C Attendant Console 3 Test Selector Console 4 Test External Ringing 5 Test Queue Warning Indicator 6 Test Integrated Announcement 7 Record Announcement 8 Playback Announcement 9 Delete Announcement 10 Test Music on Hold 11 Test Emergency Transfer S8700 Multi Connect only 12 Test Remote Access Interface 13 Test Terminating Trunk Transmission 14 Testthe C LAN Connectivity 15 Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only 16 Resolve Alarms Make Test Calls Make 2 calls from 1 telephone to another telephone Make the first call by dialing a telephone and make the second call by dialing a trunk access code and a Listed Directory Number LDN May 2002 292 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Test 302C Attendant Console Check all lamps are operational and call another telephone in the configuration 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button This puts the console in the self test mode gt NOTE Releasing the buttons returns the console to normal mode 2 Verify all lamps on display light and remain lighted Each row of lamps on the console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom Press Star
278. tion This section provides some simple strategies for troubleshooting an installation of an S8700 Media Server It focuses on possible problems when Installing the Media Server Hardware on page 297 e Configuring the Media Server Hardware on page 298 Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files on page 299 Installing the Media Server Hardware The media server hardware includes the e Avaya S8700 Media Servers Ethernet switch Uninterruptible Power Supply e TN2312AP IP Server Interface Problem Solution No power to the UPS Make sure the UPS is plugged into the outlet Make sure the outlet has power Refer to user s guide that comes with UPS for other solutions No power to the Ethernet switch Make sure the Ethernet switch is plugged into the UPS or outlet Make sure the UPS or outlet has power Refer to user s guide that comes with the Ethernet switch for other solutions No power to the media server Make sure the media server is plugged into the UPS Make sure the UPS has power Servers aren t shadowing Make sure you are using a crossover cable Make sure fiber optic cable is plugged in correctly RX to TX and TX to RX IPSI LEDs flash Make sure it s in the correct slot Tone Clock slot for 8700 Multi Connect slot 2 for 8700 IP Connect Ping IPSI from server Ping server from IPSI connected to top Services port on IPSI May 2002 298
279. tion 265 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server 266 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly 266 Media Server Web Interface 267 Avaya Site Administration 268 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over the Network 268 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem 268 Installing Avaya Site Administration 269 From the ASA CD 270 From the S8700 Media Server 270 May 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 13 Contents Testing the Complete Configuration 271 LED Indicators 272 8700 Media Server LEDs 272 Cajun Ethernet Switch LEDs 275 UPS LEDs 276 Telephone Console LEDS 276 IP Server Interface LEDs eit Circuit Pack LEDs 280 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs 281 SPAN LEDs 283 Testing Port Network Equipment 283 Check Port Network Status for Each Media Gateway 283 Check Circuit Pack Configuration 284 Test Media Server Interchange 285 Test the IPSI Circuit Pack 285 Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs S8700 Multi Connect only 286 Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network 287 Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network 88700 Multi Connect only 288 Save Translations if Required 290 Testing Telephones and Other Equipment 290 Make Test Calls 291 Test 302C Attendant Console 292 Test Selector Console 292 Test External Ringing 292 Test Queue Warning Indicator 293
280. tion Files 16 RFA Information requirements for new installations 17 Go to the RFA web site 1T Mount the Hardware in the Rack 18 Configure the Hardware in the Rack 20 Configure the Media Servers 20 Configure Media Server 1 21 Install license and Avaya authentication files 25 Verify media server 1 connection to customer s LAN 27 Test Media Server 1 LEDs 28 Configure SNMP traps 28 Verify date and time 29 Connect duplication cables 29 Configure Media Server 2 29 Verify media server 2 connection to customer s LAN 31 Test media server 2 LEDs 22 Busy out standby media server 32 Connect UPS cables to Ethernet Switch es 32 Configure the UPSs 33 Configure the Ethernet Switch es 35 Customize the Active Media Server 36 Set up Avaya Site Administration Dedicated Services port 36 Set up Avaya Site Administration Active Media Server 37 Input translations 37 Reset MultiVantage TM software dr Add Media Gateways 38 Administer and Enable IPSI s 38 Add IPSI translations to MultiVantage software 39 Test Connectivity to IPserver interface circuit packs 40 Verify IPSI circuit pack version 40 Enable control of IPserver interfaces 40 41 Install the Media Gateways May 2002 Contents 5 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect May 2002 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 42 Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway 44 Unpack and Inspect
281. tlets e Never push objects of any kind through the power supply or distribution unit slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock To reduce risk of electric shock do not disassemble these products Return them for repair when needed Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the products are subsequently used Power down the power unit see label on power unit on how to do this and refer servicing under the following conditions e If liquid has been spilled into any of the products e If any of the products have been exposed to water If any of the products do not operate normally e If any of the products have been dropped or damaged e If any of the products exhibits a change in performance May 2002 228 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Do not attempt to recharge batteries on your own The batteries may leak corrosive electrolyte or explode The 1145B2 power unit recharges the batteries safely Remove the batteries if the power unit will not be used for a long period of time several months or more since during this time the battery may leak e Discard discharged batteries as soon as possible Discharged batteries are more likely to leak Do not store batteries in high temperature areas Batteries
282. ttendant consoles or telephone adjuncts The remote management terminal interface trunk connection location A relay contact that actuates a customer supplied light bell or similar device The relay can activate when a major minor or warning condition occurs The device connected to the alarm leads must not exceed a rating of 30 VAC rms or 60 VDC at 0175 amps Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector on page 197 shows the pinouts for an external alarm Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 191 provides port circuit pack and telephone pin designations May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 197 Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Color Pinouts Output Power W BL 26 Major BL W 1 W O 27 Minor O W 2 W G 28 G W 3 GRD W BR 20 BR W 4 GRD W S 30 S W 5 GRD R BL 31 BL R 6 GRD R O 32 O R 7 GRD R G 33 Not Connected G R 8 R BR 34 Not Connected BR R 9 R S 35 Not Connected S R 10 BK BL 36 48 Emergency BL BK 11 GND Transfer Relay BK O 37 48 Lower O BK 12 GND BK G 38 48 G BK 13 GND BK BR 39 48 BR BK 14 GND BK S 40 48 S BK 15 GND Y BL 41 48 BL Y 16 GND Y O 42 48 O Y 17 GND Y G 43 Not Connected G Y 18 May 2002 198 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Continued Color Pinouts Output Pow
283. tus for Each Media Gateway The port network status may suggest problem areas Tests described later provide more specific diagnostic information 1 Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter Verify the screen displays a Port Network Status screen similar to the one in Sample Port Network Status Screen for Cabinet 1 S8700 Multi Connect Verify these service states Field Service State TDM Bus A in TDM Bus B in Tone Clock in EXP LINK in PKT in The cabinet carrier slot numbers for the fiber optic cables are listed For example 01A01 in the figure refers to media gateway stack 01 carrier A and slot 01 May 2002 284 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Testing the Complete Configuration Sample Port Network Status Screen for Cabinet 1 S8700 Multi Connect status port network 1 ON PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PN Control FIBER PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby LINK Endpoints Mode 1 1 0 195 01A up up 1 B PNC 01B02 03E04 standby 01B 1 A PNC 01A01 01E04 active TDM Service Control Dedicated TONE Service System System Bus State Channel Tones CLOCK State Clock Tones A in y n O1B in standby standby B in n y 01A in active active Service Major Minor Bus Open Bus PKT State Alarms Alarms Faults Leads 1 in n n 0 0 RU J Check Circuit Pack Configuration The list configuration report provides a list of circuit packs connected to the configuration
284. ult subnet mask for this UPS 8 Type GW 198 152 254 201 and press Enter Default gateway for this UPS 9 Ifsupplied enter the Get and Set community names with the following commands gt NOTE 10 If the UPS units are going to be monitored by a Network Management System NMS coordinate the assignment of the community names with the local LAN administrator See the Pre Installation Network Worksheet for 58700 Multi Connect If a NMS will not monitor the UPS units set the community names to unique string values Type CG name and press Enter Enters the Get community name Type up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the name The name field is case sensitive and cannot contain blanks Type CS name and press Enter Enters the Set community name Type up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the name The name field is case sensitive and cannot contain blanks Type HS and press Enter Displays the Host Table gt NOTE The Host Table should be empty If not in the following commands use a host table entry that is currently unassigned Type HI1 aaa bbb ccc ddd and press Enter Sets the trap destination for this UPS Type TL 1 3 and press Enter Sets the trap level for the host All traps Type TT1 land press Enter Sets the trap type Standard UPS MIB defined Type HS and press Enter Verify the table entries re displays the host table Type CF and press Enter re displays the basic administration screen Type SA and press En
285. un 1 AWG e 48V EN RTN 1AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG pcdfacdi KLC 031202 Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit Each rectifier module operates as an integral part of a complete power system with battery backup The modules operate in a redundant high reliability mode to provide 48 VDC at 850 W to a common power bus May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 61 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway The Battery Interface Unit controls the rectifier modules manages the batteries and reports the status of system power The unit provides the Remote Power Off RPO option and battery alarm interfaces for internal and external alarms 1 Install the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit comcode 107781502 in the first slot of the power distribution unit See Rectifier Module Installation on page 61 gt NOTE The Battery Interface Unit and the rectifier modules are keyed and can only install 1 way 2 Install the first 2 RMO850HA100 Rectifier Modules comcode 107793796 into the second and third slots of the power distribution unit 3 If 2 to 3 carriers are installed in the system install a third rectifier module N 1 4 If4to5 carriers are installed in the system install a fourth rectifier module 5 The fifth rectifier module slot is reserved for future system growth Rectifier
286. uts Cable Installation 129 May 2002 Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Layout Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway 130 Coupled Bonding Conductor 133 Installation Space Requirements 134 Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units 134 110 Type Hardware 134 Cable Slack Manager 134 Station Wiring Design 135 Information Outlets 135 Station Cables 135 Closets 136 Site Locations 136 Satellite Locations 137 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 140 4 Pair Station Circuits 140 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution 140 Voice and Data Terminals 145 Administration Terminals 147 148 Information Outlet Locations 148 Site Satellite and Adapter Locations 148 Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables 148 Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables 148 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits 149 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits 149 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 150 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable 152 Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable 153 Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables 153 Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity 154 Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF 156 Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF 157 Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall 158 Mount
287. vate Network Signaling System DPNSS European Computer Manufacturers Association ECMA European Telecommunications Standards Institute ETSI FCC Rules Parts 15 and 68 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC International Special Committee on Radio Interference CISPR International Telecommunications Union Telephony ITU T ISDN PBX Network Specification IPNS National ISDN 1 National ISDN 2 Underwriters Laboratories UL Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following interna tional Product Safety standards as applicable Safety of Information Technology Equipment IEC 60950 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with IEC for Electrical Equipment IECEE CB 96A Safety of Laser products equipment classification and requirements EC 60825 1 1 1 Edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 UL 60950 3rd Edition Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment ACA Technical Standard TS 001 1997 Oneor more of the following Mexican national standards as applicable NOM 001 SCFI 1993 NOM SCFI 016 1993 NOM 019 SCFI 1998 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following interna tional EMC standards and all relevant national deviations Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of Infor mation Techno
288. vices laptop Intranet access to your designated RFA portal refer to Go to the RFA web site Go to the RFA web site The RFA web site automates some of the installation procedures including generating license and authentication files For migrations it may be necessary to create a Switch Configuration File for the existing system prior to creating the license file This will ensure that existing Right To Use features are brought forward to the S8700 Media Server for Multi connect configurations Follow the procedures as outlined on the RFA web site May 2002 18 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Pre installation Setup At your laptop PC browser go to the appropriate web site Avaya Associates http associate2 avaya com sales market services and select DEFINITY REMOTE FEATURE ACTIVATION http services avaya com and select Remote Feature Activation RFA which is listed below Strategy amp Operations Re Engineering Business Partners go to the appropriate regional Business Partner portal United States http www avaya com businesspartner Canada https www avaya ca BusinessPartner Brazil http www avaya com br Home asp CALA http cala businesspartner avaya com EMEA https emea businesspartner avaya com APAC http www avaya apac com bp e Contractors go to http www avaya com services rfa 1 Using your SSO log into the RFA web site 2 Click Start
289. wave wav file formats to those listed above Telephone access creates the correct file formats Caveats Remember the following points when using the TN2501AP integrated announcement circuit pack for the first time Despite the feature name announcements are not played over the LAN but can be transferred to and from the TN2501AP circuit pack over the LAN e You cannot save or restore announcements to a TN2501AP circuit pack to or from a TN750C circuit pack flashcards tape magneto optical disks Installing VAL gt NOTE To install a TN2501AP make sure that the system is enabled for TN2501AP VAL boards If the Maximum VAL boards field on the Customer Options screen is set to 0 then you need to obtain and install a new license file before you can install the card Installing the pack includes e Verifying the required hardware on page 179 e Installing the TN2501AP Circuit Pack on page 181 e Configuring the Multi Vantage Software for the TN2501AP on page 182 Verifying the required hardware Make sure that you have the required hardware e TN2501AP VAL circuit pack 108772583 See Faceplate of VAL circuit pack on page 180 May 2002 180 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Connecting to the Customer s Network e 10 100BaseT backplane adapter 848525887 same one used for the IP Media Processor See Backplane Adapter on page 181 LAN cable with RJ45
290. ximum distance between cabinets is 1310 feet 399 3 m May 2002 194 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Installing and Wiring Telephones DS1 Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit The T1 Channel Service Unit CSU interfaces the DS1 tie trunks with the 1 544 Mbps digital facility Connect the DS1 tie trunk to a T1 CSU See Typical Connections to Channel Service Unit on page 194 gt NOTE A 3150 CSU is shown a 120A Integrated CSU ICSU may be used Contact your Avaya representative for maximum cabling distances for the 31xx series CSU or the 120A ICSU Typical Connections to Channel Service Unit 0012_1 RBP 062696 Figure notes 1 Connector to DS1 Interface Circuit Pack 5 R Ring 2 C6C Cable For Distances Over 50 Feet 6 T1 Tip 1 15 24 m Use C6E Cable s 7 RI Ring 1 3 TI Channel Service Unit CSU 3150 8 1 544 Mbps Digital Service Shown Interface 4 T Tip 9 To T1 Carrier May 2002 DS1 Cables Connector Cable Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 195 Installing and Wiring Telephones Description and Usage C6C connector cable C6D connector cable C6E connector cable C6F connector cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 15 pin male connector on the other end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to a Channel Service Unit CSU 50 foot 15 2 m s
291. y Earthquake protection installs only on Avaya SCC1 media gateways 1 Position the expansion control media gateway A J58890N in the position it is to occupy when the installation is complete Be sure it is level 2 Usinga pencil or marker and using the Front Mounting Angle as a template mark the locations of the two floor mounting holes 3 Move the media gateway out of the way and drill a hole 0 5 inch 1 3 cm in diameter and 1 5 inches 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 2 Insert a concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into each hole Secure the Front Mounting Angle to the floor using the short hex head bolts provided Move the media gateway back into place Oo 0 A At the rear of the media gateway remove the two hole plugs from the bottom of the media gateway See Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View on page 81 May 2002 10 11 12 13 14 15 Installing the 58700 Multi Connect 81 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Insert a pencil or marker through the holes in the bottom of the media gateway and mark the floor directly beneath each hole Move the media gateway out of the way and drill a hole 0 5 inch 1 27 cm in diameter and 1 5 inches 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 10 Insert a concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into each hole Move the media gateway back into place and align with the Front Mounting Angle Attach the media gateway to
292. y 1 Carrier A Slot 03 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable 1 Place the appropriate AUX connector label on the assigned 110 type terminal block row 2 Onthe expansion control carrier cable place a yellow auxiliary label on the connectors at each end of the cable 3 Write AUX on each label May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 153 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installing the Telecommunications Cabling on page 117 1 Plug the connector cable in the AUX connector on the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier Route the connector cable through the cable slack manager to the assigned 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 154 shows trunk pairs connected to the media gateway with concentrator cables To install the cables 1 2 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and sneak fuse panels Connect A25D cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the green field Connect patch cords jumper wires from the terminal block in the green field to the associated terminal block in the purple field Connect the single fingered end of the concentrator cables to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the purple field in Step 3 Connect the other e
293. y cables connecting media gateways and satellite closets to the Main Distribution Frame MDF The figure shows the cross connections for one example station circuit Example MDF Connections Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway on page 121 shows the cross connections for common circuit packs Refer to this figure when cross connecting wire pairs to the MDF May 2002 120 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Example MDF Connections Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway i 9 9 Yellow Field SE o H l i 295 79 7 t b z Y Ye a MGs CI ler Cable COO 2 7 EJ 9 E mpi Al Z Ni Gee eur Ee FEL m Intrface HL G 7 4 9 T Hae H CEE a QA LT L L V HE em ud of zajo ANS NIS Trunk Circuit Pack Line Circuit Pack 0016 0 RBP 052396 Figure notes 1 Rearof Media Gateway 9 Satellite Closet 2 Main Distribution Frame M
294. y of electrical shock do not use it near water To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product except to replace battery May 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 237 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies e This product should be operated only from the type of AC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock e Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed Tf liquid has been spilled into the product e If the product has been exposed to rain or water e If the product was dropped or the housing has been damaged e If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Using 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies can be used to supply local power to ISDN T 85xx and 84xx series telephones connected to a media gateway and to the 302C1 Attendant Console that requires auxiliary power for its display The unit can supply pow

Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents